1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 The following 2 lines are empty:
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8360 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8370 environment is identical to
8374 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8382 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8387 \begin_layout Section
8388 Nesting Environments
8389 \begin_inset Index idx
8392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8393 Nesting ! Environments
8399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8408 \begin_layout Subsection
8412 \begin_layout Standard
8414 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8416 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8418 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8420 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8445 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Enumerate
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8456 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8464 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8476 \begin_inset space ~
8481 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8483 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8486 arg "depth-increment"
8492 arg "depth-decrement"
8506 arg "depth-increment"
8512 arg "depth-decrement"
8516 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8517 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8521 \begin_layout Standard
8522 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8523 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8524 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8525 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8526 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8529 \begin_layout Standard
8530 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8532 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8534 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8537 \begin_layout Subsection
8538 What You Can and Can't Nest
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8543 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8546 \begin_layout Standard
8547 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8548 than a simple yes or no.
8549 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Completely unnestable
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8566 \begin_layout Standard
8567 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8568 environments have them:
8571 \begin_layout Description
8572 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8573 Can't nest into them.
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Description
8610 \begin_inset space ~
8613 Nestable You can nest them.
8614 You can nest other things into them.
8618 \begin_layout Itemize
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Description
8681 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8682 You can't nest anything into them.
8686 \begin_layout Itemize
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 \begin_inset space ~
8774 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 \begin_layout Standard
8782 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8800 \begin_inset space ~
8803 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8804 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8805 nested section headings violate this.
8813 \begin_layout Subsection
8814 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8815 \begin_inset Index idx
8818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8828 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8829 affected by nesting anyhow.
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8855 Figures and tables in
8859 are not affected by this.
8864 Have a look at section
8865 \begin_inset space ~
8869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8871 reference "sec:Floats"
8875 for more information about
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8884 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8885 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8889 \begin_layout Standard
8890 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8898 of its own, it behaves just like a
8899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8906 paragraph environment.
8907 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8912 Here's an example with a table:
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8920 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 This is (a) and it's nested.
8925 \begin_layout Standard
8926 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8934 \begin_inset Tabular
8935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9022 \begin_layout Standard
9023 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9030 \begin_layout Enumerate
9032 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9036 \begin_layout Enumerate
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9044 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 This is (a) and it's nested.
9054 \begin_layout Standard
9055 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9061 \begin_layout Standard
9063 \begin_inset Tabular
9064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9065 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9165 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9181 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 This is (a) and it's nested.
9193 \begin_layout Standard
9194 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9200 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset Tabular
9203 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9204 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9292 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9298 \begin_layout Enumerate
9300 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9318 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9319 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9323 \begin_layout Subsection
9324 Usage and General Features
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9329 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9338 is the innermost possible depth.
9339 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9343 level #1 – outermost
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9367 \begin_layout Itemize
9376 \begin_layout Standard
9377 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9378 both of them in the example.
9379 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9389 For example, if we tried to nest another
9394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9401 , we would get errors.
9404 \begin_layout Subsection
9406 \begin_inset Index idx
9409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9418 \begin_layout Standard
9419 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9420 We have several examples of nested environments.
9421 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9426 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9429 \begin_layout Labeling
9430 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #2-a This is level #2.
9443 We created it by using
9446 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9452 arg "depth-increment"
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9461 #3-a This is level #3.
9462 This time, we just enter
9469 arg "depth-increment"
9473 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9477 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9483 arg "depth-increment"
9490 \begin_layout Standard
9495 environment, nested inside of
9496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9504 So, it's at level #4.
9505 We did this by entering
9508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9514 arg "depth-increment"
9517 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9522 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9538 \begin_layout Standard
9543 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9546 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9552 \begin_layout Labeling
9553 \labelwidthstring MMM
9554 #4-a This is level #4.
9558 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9561 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9566 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9570 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9575 keep nesting things inside
9576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9594 \begin_layout Labeling
9595 \labelwidthstring MMM
9596 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9597 and this is level #6.
9598 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9602 \begin_layout Labeling
9603 \labelwidthstring MMM
9604 #5-b Back to level #5.
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-decrement"
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9626 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9632 arg "depth-decrement"
9635 , we're back at level #4.
9639 \begin_layout Labeling
9640 \labelwidthstring MMM
9641 #3-b Back to level #3.
9642 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9646 \begin_layout Labeling
9647 \labelwidthstring MMM
9648 #2-b Back to level #2.
9653 \begin_layout Labeling
9654 \labelwidthstring MMM
9655 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9656 After this sentence, we will enter
9660 and change the paragraph environment back to
9667 \begin_layout Standard
9668 We could have also used the
9684 environment in place of the
9689 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9693 Example 2: Inheritance
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9697 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9700 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9709 arg "depth-increment"
9713 \begin_inset Newline newline
9716 which, we will change to the
9724 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 environment, at level #2.
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9733 Notice how the nested
9737 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9741 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9745 \begin_layout Standard
9746 We ended this example by entering
9751 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9755 and reset the nesting depth by using
9758 arg "depth-decrement"
9764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9765 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9774 \begin_inset Argument 1
9777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9778 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9786 \begin_layout Enumerate
9787 This is level #1, in an
9791 paragraph environment.
9792 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9796 \begin_layout Enumerate
9801 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9807 arg "depth-increment"
9811 Now, what happens if we nest an
9815 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9816 label be? An asterisk?
9820 \begin_layout Itemize
9830 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9831 So, its label is a bullet.
9832 (We got here by using
9835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9841 arg "depth-increment"
9844 , then changing the environment to
9852 \begin_layout Itemize
9853 Here's level #4, produced using
9856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9862 arg "depth-increment"
9866 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9871 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9879 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9883 , because we are in the
9891 environment (that is, it is an
9906 \begin_layout Enumerate
9911 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9912 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9923 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9926 \begin_layout Enumerate
9930 arg "depth-decrement"
9933 to decrease the depth after the next
9936 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9953 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9957 \begin_layout Enumerate
9958 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9967 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9972 reset the counter for the label.
9976 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9986 arg "depth-decrement"
9989 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9990 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9991 into the twofold-nested
9999 \begin_layout Enumerate
10000 The same thing happens if we do another
10003 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10009 arg "depth-decrement"
10012 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10015 \begin_layout Standard
10016 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10021 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10032 The number of other
10036 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10043 The same rule applies for the
10047 environment, as well.
10050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10051 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10054 \begin_layout Enumerate
10055 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10056 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10057 the same detail with how we did it.
10066 \begin_layout Standard
10074 arg "depth-increment"
10081 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10082 the example in parentheses someplace.
10083 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10084 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10085 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10089 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Now we will add verse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 It will get much worse.
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10114 arg "depth-increment"
10124 \begin_layout Verse
10125 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10129 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10130 \begin_inset Newline newline
10136 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10144 \begin_layout Verse
10145 Here comes a table:
10149 \begin_layout Standard
10150 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10156 \begin_layout Standard
10158 \begin_inset Tabular
10159 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10160 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10247 \begin_layout Verse
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10261 arg "depth-increment"
10267 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10273 \begin_inset Newline newline
10281 arg "depth-decrement"
10288 \begin_layout Enumerate
10293 : level #1) This is another item.
10294 Note that selecting a
10298 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10299 3 times to put the table inside the
10307 \begin_layout Quotation
10308 We're now ending the
10312 list and changing to
10317 We're still at level #1.
10318 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10319 The next set of paragraphs is a
10320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10327 We will nest both the
10334 \begin_inset space ~
10339 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10343 for the letter body.
10347 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10350 to preserve the depth.
10351 Remember that you need to use
10354 arg "newline-insert newline"
10357 to create multiple lines inside the
10364 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_layout Right Address
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10379 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10380 \begin_inset Newline newline
10386 \begin_layout Address
10388 \begin_inset space ~
10394 \begin_layout Quotation
10395 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10399 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10400 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10401 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10402 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10403 as soon as possible.
10404 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10407 \begin_layout Quotation
10408 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10409 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10410 with your order, along with payment.
10413 \begin_layout Quotation
10414 We thank you again for your patience.
10417 \begin_layout Address
10419 \begin_inset Newline newline
10426 \begin_layout Quotation
10427 That ends that example!
10430 \begin_layout Standard
10431 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10432 gives you a lot of power with just
10434 We could have easily nested an
10455 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10458 \begin_layout Subsection
10460 \begin_inset Index idx
10463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10464 Nesting ! Separation
10470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10472 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10479 \begin_layout Standard
10480 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10482 For example you need two different enumerations:
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 \begin_layout Standard
10500 \begin_inset Separator plain
10506 \begin_layout Itemize
10512 \begin_layout Standard
10513 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Enumerate
10531 \begin_layout Standard
10532 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10533 list item and use the menu
10535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10536 Separated <Name> Above
10540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10541 Separated <Name> Below
10544 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10545 ) and before or behind it the
10547 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10550 \begin_layout Standard
10551 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10552 (red arrow in LyX).
10553 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10554 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10557 \begin_layout Standard
10558 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10561 arg "paragraph-break"
10568 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10571 \begin_layout Section
10572 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10573 \begin_inset Index idx
10576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10585 \begin_layout Standard
10586 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10587 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10589 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10590 be broken at the end of a line.
10591 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10595 \begin_layout Subsection
10597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10599 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10604 \begin_inset Index idx
10607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10616 \begin_layout Standard
10617 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10618 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10619 ) not to break the line at
10621 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10624 \begin_layout Quote
10625 Further documentation is given in section
10626 \begin_inset Newline newline
10630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10632 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10640 \begin_layout Standard
10641 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10656 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10665 A protected space is set with
10667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10668 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10670 \begin_inset space ~
10678 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10684 \begin_layout Subsection
10686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10688 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10693 \begin_inset Index idx
10696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10697 Spacing ! Horizontal
10705 \begin_layout Standard
10706 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10709 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10713 The length units are listed in Appendix
10714 \begin_inset space ~
10718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10720 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10727 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10731 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10736 \begin_inset Index idx
10739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10740 Spaces ! Inter-word
10748 \begin_layout Standard
10749 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10750 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10751 at the ends of sentences.
10752 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10753 automatically takes care about this.
10754 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10755 followed by a period; see section
10756 \begin_inset space ~
10760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10762 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10767 To insert a normal space, select
10769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10772 \begin_inset space ~
10780 arg "space-insert normal"
10786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10790 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10795 \begin_inset Index idx
10798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10807 \begin_layout Standard
10809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10816 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10825 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10826 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10827 inside abbreviations:
10830 \begin_layout Quote
10832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10836 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10839 \begin_layout Standard
10840 or between values and units.
10841 Compare for example this:
10842 \begin_inset Newline newline
10846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10850 \begin_inset Newline newline
10853 10 kg (normal space
10856 \begin_layout Standard
10857 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10862 \begin_inset space ~
10870 arg "space-insert thin"
10876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10880 \begin_layout Standard
10881 You can also insert the following space types:
10884 \begin_layout Description
10886 \begin_inset space ~
10890 \begin_inset space ~
10893 space A line with a
10894 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10898 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10902 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10905 negative thin space between the arrows.
10908 \begin_layout Description
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10914 \begin_inset space ~
10917 space A line with a
10918 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10922 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10926 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10929 negative medium space between the arrows.
10932 \begin_layout Description
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10938 \begin_inset space ~
10941 space A line with a
10942 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10946 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10950 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10953 negative thick space between the arrows.
10956 \begin_layout Description
10958 \begin_inset space ~
10962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10966 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10970 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10974 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10978 \begin_inset space ~
10982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10985 em) space between the arrows.
10988 \begin_layout Description
10990 \begin_inset space ~
10994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10998 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11002 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11006 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11010 \begin_inset space ~
11014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11017 em) space between the arrows.
11020 \begin_layout Description
11022 \begin_inset space ~
11026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11030 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11034 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11038 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11042 \begin_inset space ~
11046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11049 em) space between the arrows.
11052 \begin_layout Description
11054 \begin_inset space ~
11058 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11062 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11067 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11074 cm space between the arrows.
11077 \begin_layout Standard
11079 \begin_inset space ~
11083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11085 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11089 lists the different space sizes.
11092 \begin_layout Standard
11093 \begin_inset Float table
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11104 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11108 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11118 \begin_inset Tabular
11119 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11120 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11238 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11397 \begin_inset Index idx
11400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11409 \begin_layout Standard
11410 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11411 feature for adding extra space
11412 in a uniform fashion.
11413 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11414 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11415 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11416 equally between themselves.
11419 \begin_layout Standard
11420 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11423 \begin_layout Quote
11425 This is on the left side
11426 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11429 This is on the right
11432 \begin_layout Quote
11435 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11439 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11445 \begin_layout Quote
11448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11456 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11462 \begin_layout Standard
11463 That was an example in the
11469 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11473 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11477 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11480 is one in a standard paragraph.
11481 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11485 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11488 \begin_layout Standard
11489 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11492 \begin_inset space ~
11497 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11500 \begin_layout Standard
11502 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11506 \begin_inset space ~
11512 \begin_layout Standard
11514 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11524 \begin_layout Standard
11526 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11536 \begin_layout Standard
11538 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11548 \begin_layout Standard
11550 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11554 \begin_inset space ~
11560 \begin_layout Standard
11562 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11566 \begin_inset space ~
11572 \begin_layout Standard
11573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11581 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11585 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11587 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11588 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11592 option in the space dialog.
11600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11604 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11609 \begin_inset Index idx
11612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11621 \begin_layout Standard
11622 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11623 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11626 \begin_layout Standard
11627 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11630 What is correct English?:
11631 \begin_inset Newline newline
11635 \begin_inset Newline newline
11639 \begin_inset space ~
11642 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11658 \begin_inset Newline newline
11662 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11673 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11679 \begin_layout Standard
11681 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11698 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11701 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11705 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11711 \begin_inset space ~
11715 \begin_inset space ~
11719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11722 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11731 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11732 That is why it is named
11733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11741 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11742 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11746 \begin_layout Subsection
11748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11750 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11755 \begin_inset Index idx
11758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11767 \begin_layout Standard
11768 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11773 \begin_inset space ~
11779 There you find the following sizes:
11782 \begin_layout Standard
11795 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11796 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11801 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11803 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11804 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11806 \begin_inset space ~
11812 \begin_inset Index idx
11815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11816 Document ! Settings
11821 for the paragraph separation.
11822 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11833 \begin_layout Standard
11839 \begin_inset Index idx
11842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11849 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11854 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11855 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11864 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11873 s are described in section
11874 \begin_inset space ~
11878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11880 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11889 If there are several
11893 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11894 You can therefore use
11898 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11901 \begin_layout Standard
11906 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11907 \begin_inset space ~
11911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11913 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11920 \begin_layout Standard
11921 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11931 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11932 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11944 \begin_layout Subsection
11945 Paragraph Alignment
11946 \begin_inset Index idx
11949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11950 Paragraph ! Alignment
11958 \begin_layout Standard
11959 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11961 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11964 dialog (toolbar button
11967 arg "layout-paragraph"
11971 There are five possibilities:
11974 \begin_layout Itemize
11982 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11988 \begin_layout Itemize
11996 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12002 \begin_layout Itemize
12010 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12016 \begin_layout Itemize
12024 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12030 \begin_layout Itemize
12038 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12044 \begin_layout Standard
12045 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12046 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12047 the left and right margins.
12048 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12051 \begin_layout Standard
12053 This paragraph is right aligned,
12056 \begin_layout Standard
12058 this one is centered,
12061 \begin_layout Standard
12063 this one is left aligned.
12066 \begin_layout Subsection
12068 \begin_inset Index idx
12071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12072 Page breaks ! Forced
12078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12080 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12087 \begin_layout Standard
12088 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12090 force a page break where you want one.
12091 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12092 is good at page breaking.
12093 Only if you use a lot of
12097 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12098 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12101 \begin_layout Standard
12102 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12103 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12107 have to change the page breaking.
12110 \begin_layout Standard
12111 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12113 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12116 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12118 \begin_inset space ~
12124 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12127 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12129 \begin_inset space ~
12134 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12136 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12137 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12140 \begin_layout Standard
12141 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12142 at the top of a page.
12143 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12145 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12146 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12147 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12151 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12155 to learn more about
12162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12166 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12171 \begin_inset Index idx
12174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12175 Page breaks ! Clear
12183 \begin_layout Standard
12184 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12185 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12186 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12187 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12188 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12192 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12195 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12203 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12206 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12208 \begin_inset space ~
12212 \begin_inset space ~
12217 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12218 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12221 \begin_layout Subsection
12223 \begin_inset Index idx
12226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12235 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12242 \begin_layout Standard
12243 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12245 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12248 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12254 \begin_inset space ~
12262 arg "newline-insert newline"
12266 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12269 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12275 \begin_inset space ~
12283 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12286 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12288 This is useful to avoid
12289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12296 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12299 \begin_layout Standard
12300 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12301 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12303 very good at line breaking.
12304 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12305 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12306 \begin_inset space ~
12310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12312 reference "sec:Quote"
12317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12319 reference "sec:Verse"
12324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12326 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12333 \begin_layout Subsection
12335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12337 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12342 \begin_inset Index idx
12345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12354 \begin_layout Standard
12356 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12367 \begin_layout Standard
12371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12372 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12374 \begin_inset space ~
12379 you can insert horizontal lines.
12380 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12381 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12382 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12385 \begin_layout Standard
12387 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12398 \begin_layout Section
12399 Characters and Symbols
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12403 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12404 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12405 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12413 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12417 for information on how this is done.
12420 \begin_layout Standard
12421 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12426 dialog via the menu
12428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12429 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12435 \begin_layout Standard
12436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12444 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12445 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12447 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12455 \begin_layout Section
12456 Fonts and Text Styles
12457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12459 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12466 \begin_layout Subsection
12468 \begin_inset Index idx
12471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12480 \begin_layout Standard
12481 There are two types of fonts:
12484 \begin_layout Description
12486 \begin_inset space ~
12490 \begin_inset Index idx
12493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12499 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12504 characters) in the font.
12505 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12506 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12507 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12508 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12509 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12510 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12511 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12512 \begin_inset Newline newline
12515 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12516 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12517 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12518 sizes than at small ones.
12519 \begin_inset Newline newline
12533 \begin_inset space ~
12541 \begin_layout Description
12543 \begin_inset space ~
12547 \begin_inset Index idx
12550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12556 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12557 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12558 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12559 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12560 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12561 image manipulation program.
12562 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12563 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12567 pixels high up to 34
12568 \begin_inset space ~
12571 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12572 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12573 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12575 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12576 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12577 \begin_inset Newline newline
12580 Bitmap fonts are named
12583 \begin_inset space ~
12588 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12591 \begin_layout Standard
12592 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12593 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12594 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12595 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12596 use scalable fonts.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12600 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12603 \begin_layout Standard
12604 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12605 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12606 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12607 font to emphasize text, you use an
12608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12616 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12618 In \SpecialChar LyX
12619 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12623 \begin_layout Subsection
12626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12628 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12635 \begin_layout Standard
12636 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 used its own fonts.
12638 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12639 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12642 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12644 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12645 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12646 to a word processor.
12647 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12648 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 files are very portable across
12650 different machines.
12651 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 has increased a lot
12653 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12656 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12658 \begin_inset space ~
12662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12664 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12669 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12670 code in the document
12671 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12674 \begin_layout Standard
12675 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12676 engines that are also able directly
12677 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12679 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12681 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12683 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12684 that is installed on your system.
12685 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12688 \begin_layout Standard
12689 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12697 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12698 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12706 \begin_layout Subsection
12707 Document Font and Font size
12708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12710 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12715 \begin_inset Index idx
12718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12725 \begin_inset Index idx
12728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12737 \begin_layout Standard
12738 You can set the document fonts in the
12740 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12744 \begin_inset Index idx
12747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12748 Document ! Settings
12758 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12759 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12762 \begin_inset space ~
12771 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12773 \begin_inset space ~
12776 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12779 \begin_layout Standard
12784 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12785 This requires that you use
12797 as the output format, i.
12798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12802 \begin_inset space \space{}
12805 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12806 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12807 installed (see section
12808 \begin_inset space ~
12812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12814 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12819 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12821 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12822 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12824 \begin_inset space ~
12827 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12828 cannot determine the family.
12829 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12830 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12833 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12836 \begin_layout Standard
12837 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12838 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12843 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12849 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12851 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12853 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12856 font encoding, this is
12857 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12858 , depending on the document language,
12861 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12862 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12870 \begin_inset space ~
12876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12886 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12887 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12895 \begin_inset space ~
12901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12909 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
12913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12930 European Computer Modern
12933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12941 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12944 \begin_layout Standard
12949 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12950 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12955 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12958 \begin_inset space ~
12963 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12969 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12970 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12973 \begin_layout Itemize
12977 \begin_inset space ~
12982 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12995 \begin_inset space ~
13000 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13001 community in order to replace
13005 as the default font.
13006 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13007 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13010 \begin_inset space ~
13023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13024 One difference is improved kerning.
13032 \begin_layout Itemize
13033 If you do not like the look of
13041 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13046 \begin_inset space ~
13052 \begin_inset space ~
13062 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13063 \begin_inset space ~
13066 serif and typewriter fonts,
13070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13071 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13078 \begin_inset space ~
13087 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13092 \begin_inset space \space{}
13100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13104 \begin_inset space \space{}
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13128 but you can also select your own.
13129 \begin_inset Newline newline
13132 The differences between roman,
13135 \begin_inset space ~
13144 fonts are explained in section
13145 \begin_inset space ~
13149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13151 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13156 \begin_inset Newline newline
13162 \begin_inset space ~
13167 was originally designed for newspapers.
13168 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13169 into the small newspaper columns.
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13178 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13181 \begin_layout Standard
13182 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13195 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13200 depends on the class you are using.
13201 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13204 \begin_layout Standard
13205 Note that the font size is the
13210 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13211 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13212 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13213 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13216 \begin_inset space ~
13222 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13229 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13236 \begin_layout Standard
13240 \begin_inset space ~
13245 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13247 \begin_inset space ~
13250 serif or typewriter.
13255 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13265 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13268 \begin_layout Standard
13273 LaTeX font encoding
13275 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13276 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13282 \begin_inset Index idx
13285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13293 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13295 \begin_inset space ~
13299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13301 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13308 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13309 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13310 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13314 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13322 \begin_layout Standard
13323 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13325 Use Old Style Figures
13329 Use True Small Caps
13332 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13335 Use Old Style Figures
13337 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13339 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13347 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13351 Use True Small Caps
13353 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13354 of scaled capitals.
13355 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13356 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13359 \begin_layout Standard
13364 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13365 a font to display the script characters.
13369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13370 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13376 \begin_inset Index idx
13379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13386 So this has no effect for the document language
13402 \begin_layout Standard
13405 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13407 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13408 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13414 \begin_inset Index idx
13417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13419 packages ! microtype
13428 \begin_layout Standard
13431 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13433 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13438 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13439 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13445 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13446 \begin_inset space ~
13450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13452 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13462 \begin_layout Standard
13463 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13467 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13475 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13480 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13481 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13483 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13485 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13488 dialog, see section
13489 \begin_inset space ~
13493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13495 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13507 \begin_layout Subsection
13511 \begin_layout Standard
13512 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13513 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13515 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13516 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13517 choose a math font in the dialog
13519 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13523 \begin_inset Index idx
13526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13527 Document ! Settings
13533 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13534 automatically selects a math font.
13535 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13536 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13545 \begin_inset space ~
13551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13556 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13557 document font is available.
13560 \begin_layout Standard
13561 Note that the math font will not be used for
13565 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13571 or by the insertion of the command
13578 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13579 \begin_inset space ~
13583 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13584 while the math characters do not.
13586 \begin_inset space ~
13589 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13592 \begin_inset space ~
13600 \begin_inset space ~
13605 in the document font settings.
13608 \begin_layout Standard
13609 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13610 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13611 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13612 font (in most cases
13613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13619 \begin_inset space ~
13625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13628 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13629 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13637 \begin_inset space ~
13643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13649 \begin_layout Subsection
13650 Using Different Character Styles
13651 \begin_inset Index idx
13654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13661 \begin_inset Index idx
13664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13673 \begin_layout Standard
13674 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13675 automatically changes the character style for certain
13676 paragraph environments.
13678 supports two character styles,
13687 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13691 \begin_layout Standard
13696 style, do one of the following:
13699 \begin_layout Itemize
13700 click on the toolbar button
13709 \begin_layout Itemize
13710 use the key binding
13719 \begin_layout Standard
13720 These commands are all toggles.
13725 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13728 \begin_layout Standard
13729 One typically uses the
13733 style for proper names.
13735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13742 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13750 \begin_layout Standard
13751 A more widely used character style is the
13756 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13763 \begin_layout Itemize
13764 clicking on the toolbar button
13773 \begin_layout Itemize
13774 using the keybindings
13783 \begin_layout Standard
13788 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13790 use a different font.
13793 \begin_layout Standard
13794 We've been using the
13798 style all over the place in this document.
13799 Here's one more example:
13802 \begin_layout Quotation
13805 Do not overuse character styles!
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13810 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13811 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13812 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13816 \begin_layout Standard
13817 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13825 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13827 \begin_inset space ~
13830 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13836 arg "dialog-show character"
13842 \begin_layout Subsection
13843 Fine-Tuning with the
13848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13850 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13855 \begin_inset Index idx
13858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13867 \begin_layout Standard
13868 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13870 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13871 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13872 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13873 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13874 from ordinary dialog.
13877 \begin_layout Standard
13878 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13879 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13880 \begin_inset Newline newline
13883 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13884 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13887 \begin_layout Standard
13888 To use custom character styles, open the
13890 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13892 \begin_inset space ~
13895 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13898 dialog or press the toolbar button
13901 arg "dialog-show character"
13905 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13906 font property that you can choose.
13907 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13910 \begin_inset space ~
13915 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13920 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13921 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13922 environments all at once.
13925 \begin_layout Standard
13926 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13929 \begin_inset space ~
13941 \begin_layout Labeling
13942 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13956 The possible options are:
13960 \begin_layout Labeling
13961 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13966 This is the Roman font family.
13967 Normally a serif font.
13968 It's also the default family.
13978 \begin_layout Labeling
13979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13983 \begin_inset space ~
13990 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14002 \begin_layout Labeling
14003 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14010 This is the Typewriter font family.
14016 arg "font-typewriter"
14025 \begin_layout Labeling
14026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14031 This corresponds to the print weight.
14036 \begin_layout Labeling
14037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14042 This is the Medium font series.
14043 It's also the default series.
14046 \begin_layout Labeling
14047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14054 This is the Bold font series.
14067 \begin_layout Labeling
14068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14073 As the name implies.
14078 \begin_layout Labeling
14079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14084 This is the Upright font shape.
14085 It's also the default shape.
14088 \begin_layout Labeling
14089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14103 s the Italic font shape
14109 \begin_layout Labeling
14110 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14117 This is the Slanted font shape
14119 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14120 , this is different from italic).
14123 \begin_layout Labeling
14124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14128 \begin_inset space ~
14135 This is the Small caps font shape
14142 \begin_layout Labeling
14143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14148 Alters the text color.
14149 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14153 \begin_inset space ~
14158 , which means that the document default color set in
14160 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14161 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14167 \begin_inset space ~
14172 is used, you can choose between
14249 \begin_inset Index idx
14252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14261 \begin_layout Labeling
14262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14267 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14268 the language of the document.
14269 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14270 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14272 \begin_inset Newline newline
14275 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14277 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14278 When using the spell checking (see section
14279 \begin_inset space ~
14283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14285 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14289 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14292 \begin_layout Labeling
14293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14298 Alters the size of the font.
14299 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14300 proportional to the document font size.
14301 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14302 the details, but a general description of what
14308 \begin_layout Labeling
14309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14330 arg "font-size tiny"
14336 \begin_layout Labeling
14337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14358 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14364 \begin_layout Labeling
14365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14386 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14392 \begin_layout Labeling
14393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14414 arg "font-size small"
14420 \begin_layout Labeling
14421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14435 It's also the default size.
14439 arg "font-size normal"
14445 \begin_layout Labeling
14446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14467 arg "font-size large"
14473 \begin_layout Labeling
14474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14495 arg "font-size larger"
14501 \begin_layout Labeling
14502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14523 arg "font-size largest"
14529 \begin_layout Labeling
14530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14551 arg "font-size huge"
14557 \begin_layout Labeling
14558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14579 arg "font-size giant"
14585 \begin_layout Labeling
14586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14591 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14611 arg "font-size increase"
14617 \begin_layout Labeling
14618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14623 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14643 arg "font-size decrease"
14650 \begin_layout Standard
14655 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14656 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14658 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14659 — use those instead.
14660 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14663 \begin_layout Labeling
14664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14669 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14674 \begin_layout Labeling
14675 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14682 This is text with emphasize on
14685 This might seem like the same as
14689 , but it is actually a bit different.
14695 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14697 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14700 \begin_layout Labeling
14701 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14708 This is text with Underbar on.
14714 arg "font-underline"
14720 \begin_inset Newline newline
14725 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14726 when you could not change fonts.
14727 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14728 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14729 because some people
14733 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14736 \begin_layout Labeling
14737 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14741 \begin_inset space ~
14748 This is text with Double underbar on.
14754 arg "font-underunderline"
14758 \begin_inset Newline newline
14761 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14762 about double underbar.
14765 \begin_layout Labeling
14766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14770 \begin_inset space ~
14777 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14783 arg "font-underwave"
14787 \begin_inset Newline newline
14790 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14791 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14794 \begin_layout Labeling
14795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14799 \begin_inset space ~
14806 This is text with Strikeout on.
14812 arg "font-strikeout"
14816 \begin_inset Newline newline
14819 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14820 changed in the meantime.
14823 \begin_layout Labeling
14824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14828 \begin_inset space ~
14835 This is text with Cross out on.
14838 \begin_inset Newline newline
14841 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14844 \begin_layout Labeling
14845 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14852 This is text with Noun on.
14859 , this is a logical attribute.
14860 Normally it's equivalent to
14863 \begin_inset space ~
14872 \begin_layout Standard
14873 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14874 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14876 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14878 \begin_inset space ~
14881 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14887 arg "dialog-show character"
14890 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14891 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14894 arg "textstyle-apply"
14898 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14902 \begin_layout Standard
14903 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14910 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14911 (suppose you just set the shape to
14912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14930 \begin_inset space ~
14942 \begin_layout Standard
14943 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14951 \begin_inset space ~
14963 \begin_layout Itemize
14969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14976 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14994 \begin_inset Newline newline
14998 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15012 \begin_inset Note Note
15015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15016 For more on phantoms see section
15017 \begin_inset space ~
15021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15023 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15033 \begin_inset Newline newline
15039 \begin_layout Itemize
15044 fonts use characters with serifs.
15045 These are the small
15046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15053 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15054 The following example shows the difference:
15055 \begin_inset Newline newline
15059 \begin_inset Newline newline
15064 text without serifs
15067 \begin_inset Newline newline
15070 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15071 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15078 \begin_layout Itemize
15083 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15084 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15085 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15088 \begin_layout Standard
15089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15096 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15097 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15100 \begin_inset space ~
15105 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15106 the property to be removed.
15107 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15108 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15109 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15127 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15128 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15136 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15140 \begin_inset space ~
15145 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15156 If you, for example, set
15157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15175 \begin_inset space ~
15180 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15189 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15192 \begin_layout Standard
15193 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15194 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15197 \begin_layout Section
15198 Printing and Previewing
15201 \begin_layout Subsection
15205 \begin_layout Standard
15206 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15207 using \SpecialChar LyX
15208 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15209 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15210 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15211 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15213 Additional Features
15218 \begin_layout Standard
15220 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15223 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15224 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15225 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15228 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15229 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15230 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15231 to turn your writing into printable output.
15232 This happens in two stages:
15235 \begin_layout Enumerate
15236 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15237 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15239 a file with the extension,
15240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15254 \begin_layout Enumerate
15255 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15256 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15257 to use the commands in the
15261 file to produce printable output.
15264 \begin_layout Subsection
15265 Output file formats
15266 \begin_inset Index idx
15269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15278 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15286 Simple text (ASCII)
15287 \begin_inset Index idx
15290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15291 File formats ! ASCII
15299 \begin_layout Standard
15300 This file type has the extension
15301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15313 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15317 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15324 \begin_layout Standard
15325 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15327 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15328 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15330 \begin_inset space ~
15336 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15337 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15338 bibliography (section
15339 \begin_inset space ~
15343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15345 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15350 If your document includes such material, use
15352 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15353 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15359 \begin_inset space ~
15363 \begin_inset space ~
15371 \begin_inset space ~
15375 \begin_inset space ~
15381 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15382 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15388 \begin_inset Index idx
15391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15392 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15401 \begin_layout Standard
15402 This file type has the extension
15403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15414 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15417 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15418 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15419 -Errors or to process it manually
15420 with console commands.
15421 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15422 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15423 's temporary directory whenever you
15424 view or export your document.
15427 \begin_layout Standard
15428 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15429 -file using the menu
15431 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15432 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15436 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15437 export variants are explained in section
15438 \begin_inset space ~
15442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15444 reference "subsec:Export"
15451 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15453 \begin_inset Index idx
15456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15465 \begin_layout Standard
15466 This file type has the extension
15467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15487 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15488 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15489 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15493 \begin_layout Standard
15494 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15495 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15496 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15497 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15498 when you view the DVI.
15499 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15502 \begin_layout Standard
15503 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15505 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15506 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15511 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15512 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15514 \begin_inset space ~
15520 The latter option uses the program
15522 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15528 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15531 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15532 font access (see section
15533 \begin_inset space ~
15537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15539 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15544 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15545 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15552 \begin_inset Index idx
15555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15556 File formats ! PostScript
15564 \begin_layout Standard
15565 This file type has the extension
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15578 PostScript was developed by the company
15582 as a printer language.
15583 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15585 PostScript can be seen as a
15586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15589 programming language
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15593 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15598 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15605 \begin_inset Index idx
15608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15610 packages ! pstricks
15620 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15623 \begin_layout Standard
15624 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15628 Encapsulated PostScript
15629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15632 (EPS, file extension
15633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15645 As \SpecialChar LyX
15646 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15647 convert them in the background to EPS.
15648 If, for example, you have 50
15649 \begin_inset space ~
15652 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15654 \begin_inset space ~
15657 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15658 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15660 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15661 EPS to avoid this problem.
15664 \begin_layout Standard
15665 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15667 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15668 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15676 \begin_inset Index idx
15679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15686 \begin_inset Index idx
15689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15698 \begin_layout Standard
15699 This file type has the extension
15700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15716 Portable Document Format
15717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15724 was derived from PostScript.
15725 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15734 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15735 looks exactly the same.
15738 \begin_layout Standard
15739 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15743 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15747 (JPG, file extension
15748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15775 Portable Network Graphics
15776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15779 (PNG, file extension
15780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15792 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15793 converts them in the
15794 background to one of these formats.
15795 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15796 will slow down your workflow.
15797 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15800 \begin_layout Standard
15801 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15803 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15809 \begin_layout Description
15811 \begin_inset space ~
15814 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15818 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15821 \begin_layout Description
15823 \begin_inset space ~
15830 ) This uses the program
15832 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15835 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15838 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15841 is a new engine, derived from
15845 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15846 access (see section
15847 \begin_inset space ~
15851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15853 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15858 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15859 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15864 \begin_layout Description
15866 \begin_inset space ~
15873 ) This uses the program
15878 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15884 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15885 font access (see section
15886 \begin_inset space ~
15890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15892 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15897 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15898 vertically written Japanese.
15901 \begin_layout Description
15903 \begin_inset space ~
15906 (cropped) This is the same as
15909 \begin_inset space ~
15914 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15915 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15916 to generate good-looking
15917 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15920 \begin_layout Description
15922 \begin_inset space ~
15925 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15929 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15933 \begin_layout Description
15935 \begin_inset space ~
15938 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15942 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15943 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15947 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15948 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15951 \begin_layout Standard
15955 \begin_inset space ~
15964 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15965 works without problems.
15966 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15967 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15971 \begin_inset space ~
15979 \begin_inset space ~
15984 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15992 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15994 \begin_inset Index idx
15997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15998 FileFormats ! XHTML
16004 \begin_inset Index idx
16007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16016 \begin_layout Standard
16017 This file type has the extension
16018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16030 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16031 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16032 When \SpecialChar LyX
16033 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16034 suitable for the purpose.
16035 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16041 between different formats, which are described in section
16043 Math Output in XHTML
16048 \begin_inset space ~
16056 \begin_layout Standard
16057 XHTML output remains
16058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16065 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16066 features are supported yet.
16070 and the World Wide Web
16074 Additional Features
16076 manual, for more information.
16079 \begin_layout Standard
16080 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16082 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16083 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16089 \begin_layout Subsection
16091 \begin_inset Index idx
16094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16103 \begin_layout Standard
16104 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16105 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16114 or use the toolbar button
16121 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16122 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16123 \begin_inset space ~
16127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16129 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16133 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16135 \begin_inset space ~
16139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16141 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16146 Further output formats can be selected via
16148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16149 View (Other Formats)
16151 or the toolbar button
16160 \begin_layout Standard
16161 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16162 viewer window using the menu
16164 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16170 Update (Other Formats)
16175 \begin_layout Standard
16176 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16179 To have a real output, export your document.
16182 \begin_layout Section
16183 A few Words about Typography
16184 \begin_inset Index idx
16187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16196 \begin_layout Subsection
16197 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16198 \begin_inset Index idx
16201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16208 \begin_inset Index idx
16211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16220 \begin_layout Standard
16221 In \SpecialChar LyX
16223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16234 symbol comes in four variants: the
16251 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16257 \begin_layout Standard
16258 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16268 height_special "totalheight"
16273 backgroundcolor "none"
16276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16277 \begin_inset Tabular
16278 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16279 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16280 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16281 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16282 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16283 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16312 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16313 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16352 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16375 system key combination
16379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16380 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16392 and the em dash with
16395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16408 is the Mac label for the right
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16432 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16433 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16455 system key combination or
16456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16470 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16483 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16522 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16528 \begin_layout Standard
16529 Dashes can also be inserted with
16531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16533 \begin_inset space ~
16536 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16544 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16545 and 2014 for the en dash).
16548 \begin_layout Standard
16549 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16550 mode and has a length of its own.
16551 Here are some examples:
16554 \begin_layout Enumerate
16555 line- and page-breaks
16556 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16566 \begin_layout Enumerate
16568 \begin_inset space ~
16572 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16582 \begin_layout Enumerate
16583 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16584 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16594 \begin_layout Enumerate
16595 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16599 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16609 \begin_layout Standard
16611 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16613 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16614 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16622 \begin_layout Subsection
16623 Dashes and Line Breaks
16624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16626 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16633 \begin_layout Standard
16634 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
16635 case and locale, e.
16636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16642 \begin_layout Itemize
16643 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
16644 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16647 \begin_layout Itemize
16648 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16652 \begin_layout Itemize
16653 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16654 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16657 \begin_layout Standard
16658 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16659 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16670 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
16673 \begin_layout Enumerate
16674 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
16675 \begin_inset space ~
16678 – common in British English and generally recommended by
16680 The Elements of Typographic Style
16683 \begin_inset space ~
16686 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
16689 \begin_layout Enumerate
16690 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16697 Prevent Hyphenation
16702 \begin_inset space ~
16718 in \SpecialChar TeX
16724 \begin_layout Itemize
16726 \begin_inset space ~
16730 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16740 height_special "totalheight"
16745 backgroundcolor "none"
16748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16757 \begin_layout Itemize
16761 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16771 height_special "totalheight"
16776 backgroundcolor "none"
16779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16783 \begin_inset space ~
16791 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16792 \begin_inset space ~
16795 – sont très utiles.
16798 \begin_layout Itemize
16805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16814 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16818 \begin_layout Standard
16819 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16820 \begin_inset space ~
16823 – in contrast to an overfull line
16824 \begin_inset space ~
16827 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16831 \begin_layout Standard
16832 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
16835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16836 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16837 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16838 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16843 \begin_layout Enumerate
16844 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
16845 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
16846 or \SpecialChar TeX
16852 \begin_layout Itemize
16856 \begin_inset space ~
16859 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16860 \begin_inset space ~
16863 – sont très utiles.
16867 \begin_layout Enumerate
16868 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
16869 \begin_inset Newline newline
16874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16875 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16876 Optional line break
16882 \begin_layout Itemize
16883 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16884 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16885 should be followed by
16886 a line break opportunity.
16889 \begin_layout Standard
16890 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
16891 \begin_inset space ~
16895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16897 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
16908 \begin_layout Enumerate
16909 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16910 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
16911 or en dashes (see section
16912 \begin_inset space ~
16916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16918 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
16928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16929 Changes and backwards compatibility
16932 \begin_layout Standard
16933 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16935 \begin_inset space ~
16938 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
16939 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
16941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16948 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
16949 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
16957 \begin_layout Standard
16958 Since \SpecialChar LyX
16960 \begin_inset space ~
16963 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16965 prevents ligation to dashes.
16967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16974 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
16979 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
16980 after the input (unless the current text font is
16988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16989 The behavior was changed since
16990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17005 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
17006 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
17007 as non-breakable dashes.
17008 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
17017 \begin_layout Standard
17020 \begin_inset space ~
17028 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
17030 \begin_inset space ~
17033 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
17036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17037 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17038 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17039 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17041 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
17045 If you used both literal and
17046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17053 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17055 \begin_inset space ~
17058 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17059 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
17062 \begin_layout Subsection
17064 \begin_inset Index idx
17067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17076 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17083 \begin_layout Standard
17084 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17085 but automatically in the output.
17086 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17092 \begin_inset Index idx
17095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17102 following the rules of the document language.
17104 does not hyphenate text in the
17108 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
17111 \begin_layout Standard
17113 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17117 font and with unusual constructs, like
17118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17126 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17127 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17128 This is done with the menu
17130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17131 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17133 \begin_inset space ~
17139 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17141 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17145 \begin_layout Standard
17146 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17147 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17158 would then see the hyphen
17159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17166 as a line break possibility.
17167 A line break at this point would look ugly.
17168 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
17171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17172 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17175 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17177 Prevent Hyphenation
17182 \begin_inset space ~
17190 \begin_layout Subsection
17192 \begin_inset Index idx
17195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17204 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17205 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17208 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17215 \begin_layout Standard
17216 When \SpecialChar LyX
17217 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17218 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17220 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17226 appropriate amount of space.
17227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17230 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17232 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17233 gets after another word.
17236 \begin_layout Standard
17237 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17238 not work in all cases.
17240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17251 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17252 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17255 \begin_layout Standard
17256 Here are some examples of
17260 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17263 \begin_layout Itemize
17268 \begin_layout Itemize
17273 \begin_layout Standard
17274 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17277 \begin_layout Itemize
17279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17283 this is too much space!
17286 \begin_layout Itemize
17291 \begin_layout Standard
17292 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17295 \begin_layout Standard
17296 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17299 \begin_layout Enumerate
17303 \begin_inset space ~
17308 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17309 \begin_inset space ~
17313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17315 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17320 \begin_inset Index idx
17323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17324 Spaces ! inter-word
17332 \begin_layout Enumerate
17336 \begin_inset space ~
17341 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17342 \begin_inset space ~
17346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17348 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17353 \begin_inset Index idx
17356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17365 \begin_layout Enumerate
17369 \begin_inset space ~
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17377 \begin_inset space ~
17384 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17386 \begin_inset space ~
17391 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17392 This function is also bound to
17395 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17401 \begin_layout Standard
17402 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17405 \begin_layout Itemize
17407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17411 \begin_inset space \space{}
17414 this is too much space!
17417 \begin_layout Itemize
17418 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17422 \begin_layout Standard
17423 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17424 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17426 will take care of this.
17429 \begin_layout Standard
17430 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17434 \begin_inset space ~
17440 feature described in the section
17442 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17447 Additional Features
17452 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17454 \begin_inset Index idx
17457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17458 Typography ! Quotation marks
17464 \begin_inset Index idx
17467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17468 Quotation marks | see
17472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17498 \begin_layout Standard
17500 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17501 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17502 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17512 The keyboard character,
17516 , generates this automatically.
17519 \begin_layout Standard
17520 You can specify what character the
17524 key produces by using the submenu
17530 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17534 \begin_inset Index idx
17537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17538 Document ! Settings
17543 dialog and switching the
17547 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17548 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17550 \begin_inset space ~
17556 \begin_layout Labeling
17557 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17569 \begin_inset space ~
17573 \begin_inset space ~
17577 \begin_inset Quotes els
17581 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17595 \begin_inset Quotes els
17599 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17602 quotation marks (as common, e.
17603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17609 \begin_layout Labeling
17610 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17613 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17617 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17621 \begin_inset space ~
17625 \begin_inset space ~
17629 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17633 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17639 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17643 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17647 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17651 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17654 quotation marks (as common, e.
17655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17661 \begin_layout Labeling
17662 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17665 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17669 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17673 \begin_inset space ~
17677 \begin_inset space ~
17681 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17685 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17691 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17695 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17699 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17703 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17706 quotation marks (as common, e.
17707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17713 \begin_layout Labeling
17714 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17717 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17721 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17725 \begin_inset space ~
17729 \begin_inset space ~
17733 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17737 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17743 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17747 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17751 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17755 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17758 quotation marks (as common, e.
17759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17765 \begin_layout Labeling
17766 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17769 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17773 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17777 \begin_inset space ~
17781 \begin_inset space ~
17785 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17789 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17795 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17799 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17803 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17807 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17810 quotation marks (as common, e.
17811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17814 g., in Switzerland)
17817 \begin_layout Labeling
17818 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17821 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17825 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17829 \begin_inset space ~
17833 \begin_inset space ~
17837 \begin_inset Quotes als
17841 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17847 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17851 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17855 \begin_inset Quotes als
17859 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17862 quotation marks (as common, e.
17863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17869 \begin_layout Labeling
17870 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17873 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17877 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17881 \begin_inset space ~
17885 \begin_inset space ~
17889 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17893 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17899 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17903 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17907 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17911 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17914 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17917 \begin_layout Labeling
17918 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17921 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17925 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17929 \begin_inset space ~
17933 \begin_inset space ~
17937 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17941 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17947 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17951 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17955 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17959 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17962 quotation marks (as common, e.
17963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17966 g., in Great Britain)
17969 \begin_layout Labeling
17970 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17973 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17977 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17981 \begin_inset space ~
17985 \begin_inset space ~
17989 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17993 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17999 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18003 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18007 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18011 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18014 quotation marks (as common, e.
18015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18021 \begin_layout Labeling
18022 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18025 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18029 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18033 \begin_inset space ~
18037 \begin_inset space ~
18041 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18045 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18051 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18055 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18059 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18063 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18066 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18071 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18072 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18073 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18074 the inner marks differ).
18082 \begin_layout Labeling
18083 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18086 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18090 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18094 \begin_inset space ~
18098 \begin_inset space ~
18102 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18106 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18112 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18116 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18120 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18124 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18127 quotation marks (as common, e.
18128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18134 \begin_layout Labeling
18135 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18138 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18142 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18146 \begin_inset space ~
18150 \begin_inset space ~
18154 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18158 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18164 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18168 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18172 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18176 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18179 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18182 \begin_layout Labeling
18183 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18184 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18192 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18202 \begin_inset space ~
18208 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18216 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18220 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18224 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18228 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18232 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18235 quotation marks (as common, e.
18236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18244 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18245 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18253 \begin_layout Labeling
18254 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18255 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18263 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18269 \begin_inset space ~
18273 \begin_inset space ~
18279 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18287 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18291 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18295 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18299 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18303 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18306 quotation marks (as common, e.
18307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18310 g., in North Korea and China)
18314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18315 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18316 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18324 \begin_layout Standard
18325 Inner quotation marks
18329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18330 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18331 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18332 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18340 does not necessarily mean
18341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18349 This is why we call them
18350 \begin_inset Quotes els
18354 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18370 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18372 \begin_inset Quotes els
18376 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18379 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18382 arg "quote-insert inner"
18387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18393 \begin_layout Standard
18394 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18395 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18396 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18397 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18398 If you check the setting
18400 Use dynamic quotation marks
18404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18405 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18408 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18409 they appear in a special color).
18410 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18411 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18416 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18419 \begin_layout Standard
18420 Individual quotation marks (i.
18421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18424 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18425 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18429 \begin_layout Subsection
18431 \begin_inset Index idx
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 Typography ! Ligatures
18441 \begin_inset Index idx
18444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18475 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18482 \begin_layout Standard
18483 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18484 print them as single characters.
18485 These groups are known as
18490 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18491 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18493 Here are the standard ligatures:
18496 \begin_layout Itemize
18500 \begin_layout Itemize
18504 \begin_layout Itemize
18508 \begin_layout Itemize
18512 \begin_layout Itemize
18516 \begin_layout Standard
18517 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18520 \begin_layout Standard
18521 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18522 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18530 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18546 To break a ligature, use
18548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18549 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18551 \begin_inset space ~
18558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18569 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18586 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18594 \begin_layout Subsection
18596 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18598 \begin_inset Index idx
18601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18611 \begin_layout Standard
18614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18615 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18619 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18622 \begin_layout Description
18624 The name of the game.
18627 \begin_layout Description
18629 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18633 \begin_layout Description
18635 The \SpecialChar TeX
18636 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18640 \begin_layout Description
18641 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18642 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18646 \begin_layout Standard
18647 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18653 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18661 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18662 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18663 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18664 converges to the number
18665 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18668 : The actual version is
18669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18677 , the previous one was
18678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18689 \begin_layout Subsection
18691 \begin_inset Index idx
18694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18703 \begin_layout Standard
18704 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18705 space between two words.
18706 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18716 for units use the menu
18718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18719 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18721 \begin_inset space ~
18729 arg "space-insert thin"
18735 \begin_layout Standard
18736 Here is an example to show the differences:
18739 \begin_layout Standard
18740 \begin_inset Tabular
18741 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18742 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18743 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18744 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18755 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 space between number and unit
18774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18783 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18795 half space between number and unit
18808 \begin_layout Subsection
18810 \begin_inset Index idx
18813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18814 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18822 \begin_layout Standard
18823 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18825 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18826 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18827 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18828 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18829 These bits of text became known as
18840 \begin_layout Standard
18841 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18842 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18843 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18844 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18845 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18846 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18847 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18848 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18849 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18850 \begin_inset Newline newline
18858 \begin_inset Newline newline
18866 \begin_inset Newline newline
18869 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18870 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18871 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18873 \begin_inset space ~
18877 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18879 key "latexcompanion"
18885 \begin_inset space ~
18889 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18896 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18897 's page break mechanism.
18900 \begin_layout Chapter
18901 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18904 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18911 \begin_layout Standard
18912 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18915 \begin_inset space ~
18921 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18924 \begin_layout Section
18926 \begin_inset Index idx
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18945 \begin_layout Standard
18947 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18950 \begin_layout Description
18953 \begin_inset space ~
18956 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18957 \begin_inset Newline newline
18961 \begin_inset Note Note
18964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18965 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18973 \begin_layout Description
18974 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18975 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18976 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18979 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18980 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18982 \begin_inset space ~
18988 \begin_inset Newline newline
18992 \begin_inset Note Comment
18995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18996 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
19005 \begin_layout Description
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19010 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
19011 set in the document settings under
19013 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
19015 \begin_inset space ~
19021 \begin_inset Newline newline
19025 \begin_inset Newline newline
19029 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19038 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
19039 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
19044 of a comment that appears in the output.
19050 \begin_inset Newline newline
19054 \begin_inset Newline newline
19057 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19060 \begin_layout Standard
19061 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19073 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19076 \begin_layout Section
19078 \begin_inset Index idx
19081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19090 name "sec:Footnotes"
19097 \begin_layout Standard
19099 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19105 or the toolbar button
19108 arg "footnote-insert"
19120 \begin_inset Graphics
19121 filename clipart/footnote.png
19130 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19131 's representation of your footnote.
19141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19160 label, the box will
19164 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19165 Clicking on the box label again will close
19178 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19179 and click on the footnote
19194 \begin_layout Standard
19195 Here is an example footnote:
19203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19204 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19212 \begin_layout Standard
19213 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19214 position where the footnote box is placed.
19215 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19216 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19217 according to the document class.
19219 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19220 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19226 ey are described in the
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19237 \begin_layout Section
19239 \begin_inset Index idx
19242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19251 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19258 \begin_layout Standard
19259 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19261 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19265 \begin_inset space ~
19270 or the toolbar button
19273 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19299 appearing within your text.
19300 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19301 's representation of your margin
19310 \begin_layout Standard
19311 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19315 \begin_inset Marginal
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19320 This is a marginal note.
19328 \begin_layout Standard
19329 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19330 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19331 pages, right on odd pages.
19334 \begin_layout Standard
19335 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19338 \begin_inset space ~
19346 \begin_inset space ~
19354 \begin_layout Section
19355 Graphics and Images
19356 \begin_inset Index idx
19359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19366 \begin_inset Index idx
19369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19378 name "sec:Graphics"
19385 \begin_layout Standard
19386 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19387 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19390 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19399 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19402 \begin_layout Standard
19403 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19408 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19409 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19411 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19412 \begin_inset space ~
19416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19418 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19425 \begin_layout Standard
19430 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19431 of the image in the output.
19432 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19436 \begin_inset space ~
19440 \begin_inset space ~
19449 \begin_inset space ~
19453 \begin_inset space ~
19457 \begin_inset space ~
19462 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19463 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19471 \begin_layout Standard
19475 \begin_inset space ~
19479 \begin_inset space ~
19484 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19485 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19487 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19492 \begin_inset space ~
19497 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19498 with the image size is printed.
19501 \begin_layout Standard
19502 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19503 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19505 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19508 \begin_layout Standard
19510 \begin_inset Graphics
19511 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19519 \begin_layout Standard
19520 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19521 the image into a float, see section
19522 \begin_inset space ~
19526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19528 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19535 \begin_layout Subsection
19537 \begin_inset Index idx
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19549 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19556 \begin_layout Standard
19557 You can insert images in any known file format.
19558 But as we explained in section
19559 \begin_inset space ~
19563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19565 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19569 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19571 therefore uses the program
19575 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19576 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19577 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19578 \begin_inset space ~
19582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19584 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19591 \begin_layout Standard
19592 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19595 \begin_layout Description
19597 \begin_inset space ~
19600 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19601 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19602 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19606 Graphics Interchange Format
19607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19610 (GIF, file extension
19611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19623 \begin_inset Index idx
19626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19658 Portable Network Graphics
19659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19662 (PNG, file extension
19663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19675 \begin_inset Index idx
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19710 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19714 (JPG, file extension
19715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19739 \begin_inset Index idx
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19773 \begin_layout Description
19775 \begin_inset space ~
19778 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19780 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19781 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19782 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19783 \begin_inset Newline newline
19786 Scalable image formats can be
19787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19790 Scalable Vector Graphics
19791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19794 (SVG, file extension
19795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19807 \begin_inset Index idx
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19842 Encapsulated PostScript
19843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19846 (EPS, file extension
19847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19859 \begin_inset Index idx
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19894 Portable Document Format
19895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19898 (PDF, file extension
19899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19911 \begin_inset Index idx
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19929 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19930 result will not be scalable.
19931 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19945 \begin_layout Standard
19946 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19953 \begin_layout Subsection
19954 Grouping of Image Settings
19955 \begin_inset Index idx
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19959 Images ! Settings grouping
19967 \begin_layout Standard
19968 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19970 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19971 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19973 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19974 need to manually change each of them.
19978 \begin_layout Standard
19979 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19982 \begin_inset space ~
19986 \begin_inset space ~
19998 \begin_inset space ~
20002 \begin_inset space ~
20008 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
20009 and checking the name of the desired group.
20012 \begin_layout Section
20014 \begin_inset Index idx
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20033 \begin_layout Standard
20034 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
20037 arg "tabular-insert"
20042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20046 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
20047 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
20048 from the rest of the table.
20049 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
20050 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20052 Here is an example table:
20055 \begin_layout Standard
20057 \begin_inset Tabular
20058 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20059 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20060 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20263 \begin_layout Subsection
20267 \begin_layout Standard
20268 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20271 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20275 This brings up the table dialog.
20276 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20277 cursor is placed currently.
20278 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20279 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20280 done on all of your selection.
20283 \begin_layout Standard
20284 In addition to the table dialog, the
20287 \begin_inset space ~
20292 helps you in setting table properties.
20293 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20296 \begin_layout Standard
20300 \begin_inset space ~
20305 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20306 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20307 current cell respectively.
20308 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20310 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20311 of text, see section
20312 \begin_inset space ~
20316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20318 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20325 \begin_layout Standard
20326 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20327 using the check box
20336 This will merge the cells to
20340 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20341 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20342 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20343 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20344 in the last row without the upper border:
20347 \begin_layout Standard
20349 \begin_inset Tabular
20350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20351 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20353 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20355 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20366 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 \begin_layout Standard
20487 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20488 -arguments for the table.
20489 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20490 explained in the chapter
20497 \begin_inset space ~
20503 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20504 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20505 but are visible in the output.
20508 \begin_layout Standard
20509 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 Most DVI-viewers are
20521 able to display rotations.
20529 \begin_layout Standard
20534 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20539 adds lines for all cell borders.
20542 \begin_layout Subsection
20544 \begin_inset Index idx
20547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 Tables ! Multi-page
20554 \begin_inset Index idx
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 \begin_layout Standard
20567 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20570 \begin_inset space ~
20574 \begin_inset space ~
20582 \begin_inset space ~
20587 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20588 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20591 \begin_layout Description
20596 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20597 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20598 Except for the first page, if
20601 \begin_inset space ~
20609 \begin_layout Description
20613 \begin_inset space ~
20618 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20619 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20622 \begin_layout Description
20627 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20628 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20629 except for the last page, if
20632 \begin_inset space ~
20640 \begin_layout Description
20644 \begin_inset space ~
20649 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20650 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20653 \begin_layout Description
20654 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20655 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20661 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20664 \begin_inset space ~
20672 \begin_layout Standard
20673 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20674 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20675 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20681 In this context, first means first in this order:
20684 \begin_inset space ~
20696 \begin_inset space ~
20701 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20704 \begin_layout Standard
20706 \begin_inset Tabular
20707 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20708 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20709 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20710 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20711 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20712 <row endfirsthead="true">
20713 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20724 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <row endfirsthead="true">
20744 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <row endhead="true">
20777 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <row endhead="true">
20808 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 <row endfoot="true">
20841 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21833 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21851 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21862 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21893 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21924 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21955 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21986 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22017 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22048 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22110 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22141 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22172 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22203 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22234 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22296 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22327 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22389 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22482 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22513 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22544 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22575 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22606 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22637 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22668 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22699 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22761 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22792 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22822 <row endlastfoot="true">
22823 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22834 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22843 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 \begin_layout Subsection
22862 \begin_inset Index idx
22865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22874 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22881 \begin_layout Standard
22882 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22883 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22884 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22885 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22889 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22892 \begin_layout Standard
22893 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22894 for the column in the table dialog.
22895 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22896 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22900 \begin_layout Standard
22902 \begin_inset Tabular
22903 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22904 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22905 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22906 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22907 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22927 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22996 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 This is longer now.
23057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23109 This is longer now.
23114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 \begin_layout Standard
23141 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23142 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23147 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23148 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23154 Selection with the mouse or with
23158 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23159 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23160 the selection from outside the table.
23163 \begin_layout Section
23165 \begin_inset Index idx
23168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23184 \begin_layout Subsection
23188 \begin_layout Standard
23189 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23190 have a fixed location.
23192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23199 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23207 \begin_inset space ~
23212 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23213 too many notes on the current page.
23216 \begin_layout Standard
23217 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23218 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23219 and pages without text.
23220 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23221 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23222 Floats are therefore numbered.
23223 Referencing is described in section
23224 \begin_inset space ~
23228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23230 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23237 \begin_layout Standard
23238 To insert a float, use the menu
23240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23244 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23245 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23247 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23248 \begin_inset Index idx
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23258 paragraph within the float.
23259 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23260 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23261 left-clicking on the box label.
23262 A closed float box looks like this:
23263 \begin_inset Graphics
23264 filename clipart/float.png
23269 – a gray button with a red label.
23272 \begin_layout Standard
23273 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23275 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23278 \begin_layout Subsection
23280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23282 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23287 \begin_inset Index idx
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23291 Floats ! Figure floats
23299 \begin_layout Standard
23301 \begin_inset space ~
23305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23307 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23311 was created using the menu
23313 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23314 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23320 arg "float-insert figure"
23324 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23333 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23337 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23338 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23340 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23342 \begin_inset space ~
23350 arg "layout-paragraph"
23356 \begin_layout Standard
23357 \begin_inset Float figure
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 \begin_inset Graphics
23365 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23380 name "fig:A-star-in"
23397 \begin_layout Standard
23398 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23399 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23410 ) and refer to it using the menu
23412 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23418 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23422 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23423 vague references like
23424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23431 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23432 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23442 For more about cross-references, see section
23443 \begin_inset space ~
23447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23449 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23456 \begin_layout Standard
23457 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23458 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23459 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23460 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23461 as described in section
23462 \begin_inset space ~
23466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23468 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23474 \begin_inset space ~
23478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23480 reference "fig:Two-images"
23484 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23485 You can also set the images one below the other.
23487 \begin_inset space ~
23491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23493 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23500 reference "fig:Star"
23504 are the subfigures.
23507 \begin_layout Standard
23508 \begin_inset Float figure
23513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23518 \begin_inset Float figure
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23524 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23529 name "fig:Undefinable"
23541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 \begin_inset Graphics
23543 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23555 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23559 \begin_inset Float figure
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23565 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 \begin_inset Graphics
23584 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23596 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23603 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23608 name "fig:Two-images"
23625 \begin_layout Subsection
23627 \begin_inset Index idx
23630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23631 Floats ! Table floats
23639 \begin_layout Standard
23640 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23643 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23646 or the toolbar button
23649 arg "float-insert table"
23653 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23654 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23655 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23657 \begin_inset space ~
23661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23663 reference "tab:Table-float"
23670 \begin_layout Standard
23671 \begin_inset Float table
23676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23682 name "tab:Table-float"
23694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23696 \begin_inset Tabular
23697 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23698 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23699 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23700 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23701 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23849 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23852 \end{array}\right]$
23860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23894 \begin_layout Subsection
23896 \begin_inset Index idx
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 \begin_layout Standard
23910 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23911 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23912 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23914 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23922 \begin_inset space ~
23930 \begin_layout Section
23932 \begin_inset Index idx
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 \begin_layout Standard
23946 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23948 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23949 \begin_inset space \space{}
23956 \begin_layout Standard
23957 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23958 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23964 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23965 and its alignment within the page.
23968 \begin_layout Standard
23970 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23980 height_special "totalheight"
23985 backgroundcolor "none"
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 This is a minipage.
23992 The text is set in an italic style.
23995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23999 another formatting.
24007 \begin_layout Standard
24008 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24011 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
24015 as described in section
24016 \begin_inset space ~
24020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24022 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
24027 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24033 \begin_layout Standard
24034 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24044 height_special "totalheight"
24049 backgroundcolor "none"
24052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24053 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24054 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24060 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24064 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24074 height_special "totalheight"
24079 backgroundcolor "none"
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24084 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24092 \begin_layout Standard
24093 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24099 \begin_layout Standard
24100 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24102 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24109 \begin_inset space ~
24117 \begin_layout Chapter
24118 Mathematical Formulas
24119 \begin_inset Index idx
24122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 \begin_inset Index idx
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24163 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24170 \begin_layout Standard
24171 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24176 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24179 \begin_layout Section
24181 \begin_inset Index idx
24184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 \begin_layout Standard
24194 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24207 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24209 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24210 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24211 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24219 \begin_layout Standard
24220 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24224 \begin_inset space ~
24229 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24232 \begin_layout Standard
24233 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24234 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24237 \begin_layout Standard
24238 This is a line with an inline formula
24239 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24245 \begin_layout Standard
24246 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24247 paragraph, like this one:
24248 \begin_inset Formula
24255 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24258 \begin_layout Standard
24260 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24262 For example, typing
24263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24276 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24277 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24281 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24284 \begin_inset space ~
24292 \begin_layout Subsection
24293 Navigating in Formulas
24294 \begin_inset Index idx
24297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 \begin_layout Standard
24307 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24308 achieved with the arrow keys.
24310 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24311 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24316 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24317 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24321 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24325 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24328 \end{array}\right]$
24336 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24341 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24342 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24345 \begin_layout Standard
24350 , printed in this document as
24351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24355 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24362 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24363 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24364 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24369 For example, if you want
24370 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24378 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24388 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24392 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24397 , since in the latter case only the
24400 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24405 will be under the square root sign:
24406 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24412 \begin_layout Standard
24413 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24415 \begin_inset Formula
24417 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24426 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24427 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24430 \begin_layout Subsection
24434 \begin_layout Standard
24435 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24436 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24440 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24441 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24442 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24443 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24444 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24448 \begin_layout Subsection
24449 Exponents and Subscripts
24450 \begin_inset Index idx
24453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24460 \begin_inset Index idx
24463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 \begin_layout Standard
24473 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24476 arg "math-superscript"
24482 arg "math-subscript"
24485 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24487 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24490 , type in a formula
24493 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24503 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24509 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24513 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24519 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24525 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24534 , you have to use an extra
24538 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24539 For example, if you want
24540 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24546 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24552 Subscripts are similar: To get
24553 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24559 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24567 \begin_layout Subsection
24569 \begin_inset Index idx
24572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24581 \begin_layout Standard
24582 Create a fraction either with the command
24588 or by using the icon
24591 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24597 \begin_inset space ~
24603 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24604 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24605 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24610 To move back up, press
24615 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24616 \begin_inset Formula
24618 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24621 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24629 \begin_layout Subsection
24631 \begin_inset Index idx
24634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24643 \begin_layout Standard
24644 Roots can be created using the
24647 \begin_inset space ~
24655 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24661 arg "math-insert \\root"
24683 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24689 always produces a square root.
24692 \begin_layout Subsection
24693 Operators with Limits
24694 \begin_inset Index idx
24697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24704 \begin_inset Index idx
24707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24716 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24723 \begin_layout Standard
24725 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24729 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24732 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24733 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24734 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24735 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24736 The sum operator will automatically place its
24737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24744 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24746 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24750 \begin_inset Formula
24752 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24757 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24761 \begin_layout Standard
24762 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24764 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24765 behind the operator and using the menu
24767 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24768 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24770 \begin_inset space ~
24774 \begin_inset space ~
24788 \begin_layout Standard
24789 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24798 \begin_inset Index idx
24801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24808 \begin_inset Formula
24810 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24815 which will place the
24816 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24828 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24829 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24835 \begin_layout Standard
24836 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24843 Have a look at section
24844 \begin_inset space ~
24848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24850 reference "subsec:Functions"
24854 for an explanation of function macros.
24857 \begin_layout Subsection
24859 \begin_inset Index idx
24862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24871 \begin_layout Standard
24872 Most math symbols can be found in the
24875 \begin_inset space ~
24880 under one of several categories; including
24897 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24901 \begin_layout Standard
24902 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24903 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24904 don't have to use the
24907 \begin_inset space ~
24912 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24914 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24917 \begin_layout Subsection
24919 \begin_inset Index idx
24922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24931 \begin_layout Standard
24932 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24938 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24944 \begin_inset space ~
24952 arg "math-insert \\space"
24956 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24957 For example, the sequence
24962 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24965 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24967 \begin_inset Graphics
24968 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24973 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24974 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24975 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24976 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24977 , because they are negative
24979 Here are two examples:
24982 \begin_layout Standard
24992 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24998 \begin_layout Standard
25008 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
25014 \begin_layout Subsection
25016 \begin_inset Index idx
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25028 name "subsec:Functions"
25035 \begin_layout Standard
25039 \begin_inset space ~
25044 contains under the button
25047 arg "math-insert \\functions"
25050 a number of function macros, such as
25051 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
25055 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
25063 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
25070 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
25071 avoid confusions, because
25072 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
25076 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
25082 \begin_layout Standard
25083 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
25085 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
25089 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
25095 \begin_layout Standard
25096 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
25097 are placed, as described in section
25098 \begin_inset space ~
25102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25104 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25111 \begin_layout Subsection
25113 \begin_inset Index idx
25116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25125 \begin_layout Standard
25126 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25128 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25129 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25130 commands, for example, to enter
25131 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25134 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25135 Our example is entered by typing
25140 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25147 \begin_inset space ~
25151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25153 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25157 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25160 \begin_layout Standard
25161 \begin_inset Float table
25166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25167 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25172 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25176 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25186 \begin_inset Tabular
25187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25188 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25275 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25329 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25437 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25491 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25545 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25599 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25653 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25752 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25773 \begin_layout Standard
25774 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25777 \begin_inset space ~
25785 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25788 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25792 \begin_layout Section
25793 Brackets and Delimiters
25794 \begin_inset Index idx
25797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25804 \begin_inset Index idx
25807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25816 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25823 \begin_layout Standard
25824 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25826 For some purposes, using just the keys
25831 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25832 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25833 toolbar delimiter icon
25836 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25840 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25841 \begin_inset Formula
25843 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25851 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25852 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25856 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25859 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25865 \begin_inset Formula
25867 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25875 \begin_layout Standard
25876 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25877 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25883 left side and right side.
25884 If you use the option
25887 \begin_inset space ~
25892 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25893 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25895 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25900 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25901 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25904 \begin_layout Standard
25905 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25906 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25907 is to go inside the brackets.
25908 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25913 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25914 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25915 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25919 arg "math-delim ( )"
25925 \begin_layout Section
25926 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25927 \begin_inset Index idx
25930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25937 \begin_inset Index idx
25940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25947 \begin_inset Index idx
25950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25951 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25959 \begin_layout Standard
25960 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25964 \begin_inset space ~
25972 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25976 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25977 Here is an example:
25978 \begin_inset Formula
25980 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25989 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25990 \begin_inset space ~
25994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25996 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26001 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
26002 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
26003 This alignment is set in the box
26008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26057 for every column as default.
26058 For example, the sequence
26059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26070 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26071 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26072 corresponds to the relevant column.
26073 The result will look like this:
26074 \begin_inset Formula
26077 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26078 column & has & has\,right\\
26079 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26088 \begin_layout Standard
26089 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26092 arg "newline-insert newline"
26095 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26096 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26098 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26101 or the math toolbar.
26104 \begin_layout Standard
26105 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26106 It can be created with the menu
26108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26109 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26123 Here is an example:
26124 \begin_inset Formula
26138 \begin_layout Standard
26139 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26142 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26145 arg "newline-insert newline"
26149 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26154 arg "newline-insert newline"
26157 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26165 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26166 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26167 A new row is created by every further entry of
26170 arg "newline-insert newline"
26174 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26175 Here is an example:
26176 \begin_inset Formula
26178 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26179 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26184 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26185 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26186 \begin_inset Formula
26188 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26196 \begin_layout Standard
26197 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26204 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26205 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26208 reference "eq:asquared"
26213 The other types are described in section
26214 \begin_inset space ~
26218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26220 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26227 \begin_layout Section
26228 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26229 \begin_inset Index idx
26232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26233 Math ! Formula numbering
26239 \begin_inset Index idx
26242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26243 Math ! Referencing formulas
26249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26251 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26258 \begin_layout Standard
26259 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26261 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26262 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26264 \begin_inset space ~
26268 \begin_inset space ~
26276 arg "math-number-toggle"
26280 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26281 within parentheses.
26282 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26283 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26284 the document class.
26285 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26286 separated by a dot:
26287 \begin_inset Formula
26297 arg "math-number-toggle"
26300 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26301 You can only number displayed formulas.
26304 \begin_layout Standard
26305 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26307 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26308 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26310 \begin_inset space ~
26314 \begin_inset space ~
26322 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26325 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26326 \begin_inset Formula
26329 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26335 To number all lines use the shortcut
26338 arg "math-number-toggle"
26344 \begin_layout Standard
26345 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26348 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26349 A label is inserted with the menu
26351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26360 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26361 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26362 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26374 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26375 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26376 We inserted in the following example the label
26377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26384 in the second line:
26385 \begin_inset Formula
26387 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26388 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26393 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26394 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26395 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26399 \begin_inset space ~
26407 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26411 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26412 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26413 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26414 as the formula number:
26417 \begin_layout Standard
26418 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26421 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26428 \begin_layout Standard
26429 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26430 's cross-reference box are described in section
26431 \begin_inset space ~
26435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26437 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26442 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26450 \begin_layout Section
26451 User defined math macros
26452 \begin_inset Index idx
26455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26464 \begin_layout Standard
26466 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26467 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26468 Math macros are explained in section
26471 \begin_inset space ~
26483 \begin_layout Section
26487 \begin_layout Subsection
26489 \begin_inset Index idx
26492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26501 \begin_layout Standard
26502 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26503 To set a font in a formula, use the
26506 \begin_inset space ~
26514 arg "math-insert \\font"
26517 , or enter its command, listed in table
26518 \begin_inset space ~
26522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26524 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26531 \begin_layout Standard
26532 \begin_inset Float table
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26538 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26543 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26547 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26557 \begin_inset Tabular
26558 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26559 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26593 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26620 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26647 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26707 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26734 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26768 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26795 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 \begin_layout Standard
26830 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26838 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26854 \begin_layout Standard
26855 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26856 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26861 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26862 space when you need a space in the box.
26863 Here is an example where
26864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26875 denotes the set of numbers:
26876 \begin_inset Formula
26878 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26886 \begin_layout Standard
26887 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26888 You can, for example, put a character in
26897 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26901 \begin_inset Newline newline
26904 So it is better not to use this feature.
26907 \begin_layout Standard
26908 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26909 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26913 \begin_inset Newline newline
26916 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26922 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26923 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26929 \begin_layout Standard
26936 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26939 \begin_layout Standard
26940 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26942 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26943 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26945 \begin_inset space ~
26953 \begin_layout Subsection
26955 \begin_inset Index idx
26958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26967 \begin_layout Standard
26968 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26970 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26974 \begin_inset space ~
26978 \begin_inset space ~
26986 \begin_inset space ~
26994 arg "math-insert \\font"
26998 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26999 in black instead of blue.
27000 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
27001 Here is an example:
27002 \begin_inset Formula
27005 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
27006 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
27015 \begin_layout Subsection
27017 \begin_inset Index idx
27020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27029 \begin_layout Standard
27030 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
27031 automatically chosen in most situations.
27049 For most characters,
27057 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27058 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27063 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27064 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27065 thinks are appropriate.
27066 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27069 arg "math-insert \\style"
27073 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27074 For example, you can set
27075 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27078 , which is normally in
27087 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27091 The four styles are used in the following example:
27094 \begin_layout Standard
27095 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27099 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27103 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27107 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27113 \begin_layout Standard
27114 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27115 is set in a particular size with the menu
27117 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27119 \begin_inset space ~
27124 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27125 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27126 will be adjusted to correspond.
27127 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27138 \begin_layout Standard
27142 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27148 \begin_layout Section
27149 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27151 \begin_inset Index idx
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27161 \begin_inset Index idx
27164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27173 \begin_layout Standard
27175 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27176 that are in common use.
27179 \begin_layout Subsection
27180 Enabling AMS-Support
27183 \begin_layout Standard
27184 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27185 the document by selecting the checkbox
27188 \begin_inset space ~
27192 \begin_inset space ~
27196 \begin_inset space ~
27203 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27207 \begin_inset Index idx
27210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27211 Document ! Settings
27219 \begin_inset space ~
27225 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27226 -errors in formulas,
27227 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27230 \begin_layout Subsection
27232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27234 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27239 \begin_inset Index idx
27242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27243 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27251 \begin_layout Standard
27252 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27253 provides a selection of different formula types.
27255 allows you to choose between
27276 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27277 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27284 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27287 \begin_layout Chapter
27291 \begin_layout Section
27293 \begin_inset Index idx
27296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27305 name "sec:Cross-References"
27312 \begin_layout Standard
27313 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27314 's strengths is cross-references.
27315 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27317 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27318 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27319 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27322 \begin_layout Enumerate
27326 \begin_layout Enumerate
27327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27329 name "enu:Second-item"
27336 \begin_layout Enumerate
27340 \begin_layout Standard
27341 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27346 or by pressing the toolbar button
27353 A gray label box like this:
27354 \begin_inset Graphics
27355 filename clipart/label.png
27359 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27361 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27396 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27397 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27413 \begin_layout Standard
27414 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27419 or the toolbar button
27422 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27426 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27427 \begin_inset Graphics
27428 filename clipart/reference.png
27432 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27434 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27447 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27451 \begin_layout Standard
27452 As an alternative to
27454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27457 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27462 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27463 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27465 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27477 \begin_layout Standard
27478 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27479 \begin_inset space ~
27483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27485 reference "enu:Second-item"
27492 \begin_layout Standard
27493 It is recommended to use a protected space
27497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27498 described in section
27499 \begin_inset space ~
27503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27505 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27514 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27515 line breaks between them.
27518 \begin_layout Standard
27519 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27522 \begin_layout Description
27523 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27526 reference "fig:Two-images"
27533 \begin_layout Description
27534 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27535 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27547 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27554 \begin_layout Description
27555 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27556 \begin_inset space ~
27560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27561 LatexCommand pageref
27562 reference "fig:Two-images"
27569 \begin_layout Description
27571 \begin_inset space ~
27575 \begin_inset space ~
27578 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27580 LatexCommand vpageref
27581 reference "fig:Two-images"
27586 \begin_inset Newline newline
27589 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27590 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27591 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27592 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27593 it prints “on the next page”.
27594 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27597 \begin_layout Description
27599 \begin_inset space ~
27603 \begin_inset space ~
27607 \begin_inset space ~
27610 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27613 reference "fig:Two-images"
27618 \begin_inset Newline newline
27621 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27627 ; otherwise it behaves like
27631 \begin_inset space ~
27635 \begin_inset space ~
27644 \begin_layout Description
27646 \begin_inset space ~
27649 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27650 \begin_inset Newline newline
27654 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27662 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27672 \begin_inset Index idx
27675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27677 packages ! prettyref
27683 \begin_inset Index idx
27686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 packages ! refstyle
27699 \begin_inset Newline newline
27702 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27703 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27706 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27711 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27719 is the default and preferred because
27723 supports only English documents.
27724 The format is specified by using the command
27736 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27737 preamble of the document.
27738 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27756 \begin_inset Newline newline
27763 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27768 \begin_inset Newline newline
27779 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27780 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27782 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27783 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27788 , you might do so as follows:
27789 \begin_inset Newline newline
27796 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27801 \begin_inset Newline newline
27804 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27805 the package documentation
27806 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27808 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27814 \begin_inset Newline newline
27825 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27832 \begin_layout Description
27834 \begin_inset space ~
27837 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27839 LatexCommand nameref
27840 reference "fig:Two-images"
27847 \begin_layout Description
27849 \begin_inset space ~
27852 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27853 label for the reference:
27854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27855 LatexCommand labelonly
27856 reference "fig:Two-images"
27861 \begin_inset Newline newline
27864 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27865 Code, if you want to issue a command
27866 that \SpecialChar LyX
27872 , then you may want to use the
27875 \begin_inset space ~
27880 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27890 This is the form needed for e.
27891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27895 \begin_inset space \space{}
27902 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27903 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27905 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27909 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27914 You can only use the style
27918 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27922 is always possible.
27925 \begin_layout Standard
27926 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27927 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27929 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27930 \begin_inset space ~
27934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27936 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27943 \begin_layout Standard
27944 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27948 \begin_inset space ~
27952 \begin_inset space ~
27957 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27958 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27961 \begin_inset space ~
27966 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27967 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27970 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27976 \begin_layout Standard
27977 You can change labels at any time.
27978 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27979 do not need to think about this.
27982 \begin_layout Standard
27983 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27985 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27989 \begin_layout Standard
27990 References are described in detail in the section
27991 \begin_inset space ~
28001 \begin_inset space ~
28009 \begin_layout Section
28010 Table of Contents and other Listings
28011 \begin_inset Index idx
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28021 \begin_inset Index idx
28024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28025 Navigating ! Outline
28031 \begin_inset Index idx
28034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28050 \begin_layout Subsection
28052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28054 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
28061 \begin_layout Standard
28062 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
28064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28065 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28067 \begin_inset space ~
28071 \begin_inset space ~
28077 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
28079 If you click on it, the
28083 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
28084 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
28085 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
28087 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28089 \begin_inset space ~
28094 that is described in section
28095 \begin_inset space ~
28099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28101 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28108 \begin_layout Standard
28109 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28110 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28112 \begin_inset space ~
28116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28118 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28122 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28124 \begin_inset space ~
28128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28130 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28134 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28136 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28139 \begin_layout Subsection
28140 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28143 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28150 \begin_layout Standard
28151 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28153 You can insert them via the
28155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28159 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28162 \begin_layout Section
28163 URLs and Hyperlinks
28164 \begin_inset Index idx
28167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28174 \begin_inset Index idx
28177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28186 \begin_layout Subsection
28188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28197 \begin_layout Standard
28198 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28206 \begin_layout Standard
28207 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28209 \begin_inset Flex URL
28212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28214 https://www.lyx.org
28222 \begin_layout Standard
28223 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28229 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28233 \begin_layout Standard
28234 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28242 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28251 \begin_layout Subsection
28253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28255 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28262 \begin_layout Standard
28263 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28268 or with the toolbar button
28275 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28284 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28285 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28286 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28288 name "LyX's homepage"
28289 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28294 , an Email address like this:
28295 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28297 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28298 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28304 , or a link to a file.
28309 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28317 \begin_layout Standard
28318 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28331 to the link target.
28334 \begin_layout Standard
28335 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28336 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28337 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28338 the text style dialog.
28339 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28343 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28345 name "LyX's homepage"
28346 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28354 \begin_layout Standard
28355 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28359 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28362 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28366 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28368 \begin_inset Newline newline
28376 \begin_inset Newline newline
28383 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28386 \begin_layout Section
28388 \begin_inset Index idx
28391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28400 name "sec:Appendices"
28407 \begin_layout Standard
28408 Appendices are created with the menu
28410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28412 \begin_inset space ~
28416 \begin_inset space ~
28422 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28423 as the appendix part of the book.
28424 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28428 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28429 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28430 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28431 and the subsection number.
28432 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28436 \begin_layout Standard
28438 \begin_inset space ~
28442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28444 reference "chap:Credits"
28449 \begin_inset space ~
28453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28455 reference "subsec:Export"
28462 \begin_layout Section
28464 \begin_inset Index idx
28467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28476 name "sec:Bibliography"
28483 \begin_layout Standard
28484 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28486 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28487 \begin_inset space ~
28491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28493 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28500 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28505 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28506 \begin_inset space ~
28510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28512 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28517 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28518 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28519 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28523 using a bibliography database.
28526 \begin_layout Standard
28527 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28528 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28532 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28533 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28534 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28535 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28536 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28539 \begin_layout Subsection
28540 The Bibliography Environment
28541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28543 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28550 \begin_layout Standard
28555 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28557 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28566 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28568 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28569 of ASCII characters only.
28573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28575 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28578 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28584 \begin_inset Newline newline
28588 \begin_inset Flex URL
28591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28593 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28605 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28615 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28616 \begin_inset Newline newline
28623 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28624 the number of the entry.
28629 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28638 \begin_layout Standard
28639 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28644 or the toolbar button
28647 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28651 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28652 containing the available citations.
28653 Select one or more keys from the list and
28663 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28664 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28668 \begin_layout Standard
28669 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28670 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28671 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28683 \begin_layout Standard
28687 Companion Second Edition
28690 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28692 key "latexcompanion"
28700 \begin_layout Standard
28701 The \SpecialChar LyX
28702 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28703 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28713 \begin_layout Standard
28714 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28721 \begin_inset Index idx
28724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28732 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28744 Author A and Author B(Year)
28745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28752 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28754 Then, if you select
28757 \begin_inset space ~
28762 in the document settings
28763 \begin_inset Index idx
28766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28767 Document ! Settings
28774 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28776 \begin_inset space ~
28782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28784 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28791 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28794 \begin_layout Standard
28795 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28798 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28800 \begin_inset space ~
28808 arg "layout-paragraph"
28812 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28815 \begin_layout Subsection
28816 Bibliography databases
28817 \begin_inset Index idx
28820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28821 Bibliography ! Databases
28827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28829 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28836 \begin_layout Standard
28837 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28843 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28845 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28846 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28851 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28853 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28854 your working field in a database.
28855 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28856 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28857 list for that document.
28858 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28862 \begin_layout Standard
28863 The database is a text file with the file extension
28864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28875 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28876 The format is explained in
28877 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28884 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28886 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28888 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28894 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28895 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28896 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28898 \begin_inset Flex URL
28901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28903 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28911 \begin_layout Standard
28913 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28914 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28915 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28917 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28919 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28920 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28921 Those are addressed by
28926 \begin_inset Index idx
28929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28931 packages ! biblatex
28937 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28938 (although it has been significantly
28939 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28949 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28950 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28951 might conversely fail to correctly
28952 handle databases that use specific
28961 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28965 \begin_layout Standard
28966 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28971 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28977 \begin_inset Index idx
28980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28981 Document ! Settings
28993 \begin_inset space ~
28998 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29007 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29009 \begin_inset Index idx
29012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29013 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29022 \begin_layout Standard
29023 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29031 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29033 \begin_inset space ~
29039 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
29040 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29048 Add bibliography to TOC
29050 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29055 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29056 in the document or just the cited references.
29059 \begin_layout Standard
29060 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29061 style file is a text file with the file extension
29062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29073 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
29074 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29075 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
29076 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29078 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29084 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29085 \begin_inset Newline newline
29089 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29091 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29101 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29106 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29110 \begin_layout Standard
29111 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29114 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29116 \begin_inset Index idx
29119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29120 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29126 \begin_inset Index idx
29129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29131 packages ! biblatex
29139 \begin_layout Standard
29140 Accessing a database via
29144 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29152 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29154 \begin_inset space ~
29160 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29161 you cannot select a
29166 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29175 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29188 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29189 file (text file with the file extension
29190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29201 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29202 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29204 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29208 \begin_layout Standard
29213 styles are not set in the
29216 \begin_inset space ~
29221 dialog, but in the document settings.
29222 \begin_inset Index idx
29225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29226 Document ! Settings
29231 However, in the dialog in the
29235 field, which is only visible if you use
29239 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29240 example how its heading will appear).
29241 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29246 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29256 \begin_layout Standard
29257 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29258 \begin_inset space ~
29262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29264 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29275 Bibliography Processors
29278 \begin_layout Standard
29279 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29280 uses a bibliography processor,
29281 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29282 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29283 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29285 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29286 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29289 \begin_layout Standard
29290 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29292 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29293 You can do this on a general level in
29295 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29296 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29297 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29300 or for individual documents in
29302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29303 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29307 The following variants are available by default:
29310 \begin_layout Description
29311 biber a specific, modern processor
29312 \begin_inset Index idx
29315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29322 developed exclusively for
29326 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29332 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29337 makes use of; if you use the
29341 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29348 \begin_layout Description
29349 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29350 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29351 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29355 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29358 \begin_layout Description
29359 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29360 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29364 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29368 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29372 features are supported.
29375 \begin_layout Standard
29376 By default (with the
29382 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29383 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29396 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29397 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29398 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29401 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29402 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29415 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29416 -based bibliography styles).
29417 This should suit most needs.
29420 \begin_layout Standard
29421 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29422 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29423 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29428 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29429 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29430 You can adjust it in
29432 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29433 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29434 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29440 \begin_layout Standard
29441 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29442 can add below the selection.
29443 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29444 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29450 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29464 \begin_layout Standard
29466 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29468 These are explained in detail in section
29470 Customizing Bibliographies
29474 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29479 Additional Features
29484 \begin_layout Subsection
29486 \begin_inset Index idx
29489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29490 Bibliography ! Citation format
29496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29498 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29505 \begin_layout Standard
29506 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29511 \begin_inset space \space{}
29514 numerical citation (as
29515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29522 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29530 ) or author-year citations (as
29531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29540 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29544 \begin_layout Standard
29545 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29549 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29553 \begin_inset Index idx
29556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29557 Document ! Settings
29562 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29568 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29569 labels, is there to use
29572 \begin_inset space ~
29583 \begin_inset space ~
29588 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29591 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29598 \begin_layout Standard
29599 With a bibliography database (see
29600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29602 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29609 ) one has in contrary to the
29613 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29614 These style formats are available:
29617 \begin_layout Description
29619 \begin_inset space ~
29622 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29623 -based approached without any additional packages
29624 (simple numeric citations).
29627 \begin_layout Description
29628 Biblatex loads the package
29633 \begin_inset Index idx
29636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29638 packages ! biblatex
29643 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29645 Biblatex citation style
29649 Biblatex bibliography style
29652 Options to the package
29656 can be entered in the
29663 \begin_layout Description
29665 \begin_inset space ~
29669 \begin_inset space ~
29672 mode) loads the package
29676 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29677 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29689 behavior very closely.
29694 this option has some additional styles.
29699 styles are also supported by this variant.
29702 \begin_layout Description
29704 \begin_inset space ~
29707 (BibTeX) loads the package
29712 \begin_inset Index idx
29715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29722 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29725 \begin_layout Description
29727 \begin_inset space ~
29730 (BibTeX) loads the package
29735 \begin_inset Index idx
29738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29745 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29748 \begin_layout Standard
29757 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29759 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29768 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29770 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29771 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29773 Biblatex citation style
29776 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29782 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29786 \begin_layout Standard
29787 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29788 are available in the
29793 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29794 a name prefix such as
29795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29810 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29815 \begin_inset space \space{}
29819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29830 \begin_layout Standard
29831 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29837 \begin_inset space \space{}
29840 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29846 \begin_inset space \space{}
29850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29862 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29866 \begin_inset space ~
29874 \begin_inset space ~
29880 Here is a simple example where the text
29881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29885 \begin_inset space ~
29889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29892 appears after the reference:
29895 \begin_layout Quote
29897 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29900 key "latexcompanion"
29908 \begin_layout Standard
29909 All styles except for
29913 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29923 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29927 \begin_layout Standard
29928 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29929 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29930 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29935 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29936 multi-citation (so-called
29937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29940 qualified citation lists
29941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29947 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29952 dialog will display three columns in the field
29959 \begin_inset space ~
29967 \begin_inset space ~
29975 \begin_inset space ~
29981 If you double-click on an item's
29984 \begin_inset space ~
29992 \begin_inset space ~
29997 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30000 General text before
30006 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30009 \begin_layout Section
30011 \begin_inset Index idx
30014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30030 \begin_layout Standard
30031 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30035 \begin_inset space ~
30040 or the toolbar button
30047 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30048 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30049 by \SpecialChar LyX
30050 as the index entry.
30053 \begin_layout Standard
30054 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30057 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30059 \begin_inset space ~
30065 A light blue box labeled
30066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30077 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30078 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30082 \begin_layout Standard
30083 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30084 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30085 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30086 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30088 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30090 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30098 \begin_layout Subsection
30099 Grouping Index Entries
30100 \begin_inset Index idx
30103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30112 \begin_layout Standard
30113 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30115 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30116 lists under the entry
30117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30125 First we create the entry
30126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30134 \begin_inset space ~
30138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30140 reference "subsec:Lists"
30145 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30146 \begin_inset space ~
30150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30152 reference "sec:Itemize"
30156 , we insert the command
30159 \begin_layout Standard
30165 \begin_layout Standard
30169 \begin_layout Standard
30175 \begin_layout Standard
30176 for the enumerated list in section
30177 \begin_inset space ~
30181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30183 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30190 \begin_layout Standard
30191 The exclamation mark
30192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30199 marks the grouping levels.
30200 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30201 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30202 If we don't have an index entry for
30203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30210 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30213 \begin_layout Subsection
30215 \begin_inset Index idx
30218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30219 Index ! Page ranges
30227 \begin_layout Standard
30228 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30230 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30231 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30232 an index entry in section
30233 \begin_inset space ~
30237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30239 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30246 \begin_layout Standard
30249 Paragraph environments|(
30252 \begin_layout Standard
30253 and another entry at the end of section
30254 \begin_inset space ~
30258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30260 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30267 \begin_layout Standard
30270 Paragraph environments|)
30273 \begin_layout Standard
30275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30298 respectively start and end the index range.
30299 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30300 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30301 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30302 An example is the index entry
30303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30306 Document ! Settings
30307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30313 \begin_layout Subsection
30315 \begin_inset Index idx
30318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30319 Index ! Cross referencing
30327 \begin_layout Standard
30328 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30329 We referred for example in the index entry
30330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30338 \begin_inset space ~
30342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30344 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30348 ) to the index entry
30349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30356 in the same section using the entry
30359 \begin_layout Standard
30362 GIF|see{Image formats}
30365 \begin_layout Standard
30366 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30368 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30369 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30372 \begin_layout Subsection
30374 \begin_inset Index idx
30377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 Index ! Entry order
30386 \begin_layout Standard
30387 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30388 follow the rules for the index order.
30389 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30395 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30397 \begin_inset space ~
30401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30403 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30412 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30413 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30438 \begin_inset Index idx
30441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30442 Dummy entries ! maïs
30448 \begin_inset Index idx
30451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30452 Dummy entries ! maître
30458 \begin_inset Index idx
30461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30462 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30467 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30468 maïs, maison, maître.
30469 To achieve this, we use the command
30472 \begin_layout Standard
30475 previous entry@current entry
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30479 In our case we want to have
30480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30495 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30498 \begin_layout Standard
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30505 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30506 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30508 See the next subsection for an example.
30511 \begin_layout Subsection
30513 \begin_inset Index idx
30516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30517 Index ! Entry layout
30525 \begin_layout Standard
30526 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30527 \begin_inset Index idx
30530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30533 This is an italic dummy entry
30538 You can also format the page number using the character
30539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30546 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30547 -command without a backslash.
30548 We can write for example
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30554 italic page number:|textit
30557 \begin_layout Standard
30558 to get the page number in italic.
30559 \begin_inset Index idx
30562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30563 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30568 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30569 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30587 \begin_inset space ~
30593 Have a look at section
30594 \begin_inset space ~
30598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30600 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30604 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30608 \begin_layout Standard
30609 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30617 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30621 to generate the index, see section
30622 \begin_inset space ~
30626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30628 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30637 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30642 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30643 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30646 key "latexcompanion"
30659 \begin_layout Standard
30660 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30662 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30663 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30664 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30665 If so, put the following in the preamble
30668 \begin_layout Standard
30680 \begin_layout Standard
30684 \begin_layout Standard
30690 \begin_layout Standard
30691 in the index entry.
30692 \begin_inset Index idx
30695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30696 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30701 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30702 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30703 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30706 \begin_layout Standard
30707 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30708 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30709 a bold font for all index entries.
30710 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30722 documentation for details,
30723 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30725 key "makeindex,xindy"
30733 \begin_layout Subsection
30735 \begin_inset Index idx
30738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30747 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30754 \begin_layout Standard
30755 If the index generation program
30759 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30760 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30764 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30765 distribution, is used.
30769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30774 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30775 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30776 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30777 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30778 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30788 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30790 dialog, see section
30791 \begin_inset space ~
30795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30797 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30802 The available options are listed and explained in
30803 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30805 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30811 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30815 \begin_layout Standard
30816 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30817 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30821 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30825 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30826 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30829 \begin_layout Subsection
30833 \begin_layout Standard
30834 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30835 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30843 next to the standard index.
30845 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30846 that add this feature.
30853 \begin_inset Index idx
30856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30858 packages ! splitidx
30863 package to generate multiple indexes.
30864 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30870 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30872 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30880 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30881 style, but it also includes
30882 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30883 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30891 \begin_layout Standard
30892 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30893 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30895 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30896 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30899 and select the option
30901 Use multiple Indexes
30908 already contains the standard index
30909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30917 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30918 also appear as a heading) to the
30922 input field and press the
30927 The new index now also appears in the list.
30928 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30929 label color to the new index.
30932 \begin_layout Standard
30933 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30936 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30943 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30944 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30945 are additional features:
30948 \begin_layout Itemize
30949 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30950 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30953 \begin_layout Itemize
30954 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30955 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30960 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30961 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30962 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30963 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30966 \begin_layout Itemize
30971 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
30972 code in the name of the index.
30975 \begin_layout Section
30976 Nomenclature/Glossary
30977 \begin_inset Index idx
30980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30987 \begin_inset Index idx
30990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31021 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31028 \begin_layout Standard
31029 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31030 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31031 called nomenclature or glossary.
31034 \begin_layout Standard
31035 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31042 \begin_inset Index idx
31045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31053 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31055 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31062 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31066 \begin_layout Standard
31067 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31068 and then use the menu
31070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31076 \begin_inset space ~
31081 or the toolbar button
31084 arg "nomencl-insert"
31089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31100 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31103 \begin_layout Standard
31104 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31105 The first is the term or
31109 that you wish to define.
31114 of the term or symbol.
31117 \begin_layout Standard
31118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31126 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31127 code for nomenclature entries the option
31131 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31139 \begin_layout Subsection
31140 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31141 \begin_inset Index idx
31144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 Nomenclature ! Layout
31153 \begin_layout Standard
31154 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31158 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31165 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31173 \begin_inset Newline newline
31181 \begin_inset Newline newline
31187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31194 character starts/ends the formula.
31195 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31196 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31208 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31218 \begin_layout Standard
31219 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31220 syntax is given in section
31221 \begin_inset space ~
31225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31227 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31234 \begin_layout Standard
31238 \begin_inset space ~
31243 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31245 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31250 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31257 in this document is:
31258 \begin_inset Newline newline
31263 dummy entry for the character
31268 \begin_inset Newline newline
31280 \begin_inset space ~
31290 font use the command
31319 \begin_layout Standard
31320 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31325 \begin_inset space \space{}
31329 \begin_inset Newline newline
31345 \begin_inset Newline newline
31348 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31349 This command will make the font of all symbols
31356 \begin_inset space ~
31364 \begin_layout Standard
31365 If the characters |
31366 \begin_inset space \space{}
31370 \begin_inset space \space{}
31374 \begin_inset space \space{}
31378 \begin_inset space \space{}
31382 \begin_inset space \space{}
31385 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31386 code they need to be escaped
31387 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31388 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31389 LatexCommand nomenclature
31390 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31391 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31399 \begin_layout Subsection
31400 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31401 \begin_inset Index idx
31404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31405 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31414 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31415 -code of the symbol
31417 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31419 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31422 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31423 LatexCommand nomenclature
31425 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31433 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31437 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31438 LatexCommand nomenclature
31441 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31447 They will be sorted by
31448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31474 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31477 will be sorted before the
31481 since the character
31482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31489 is considered in sorting.
31492 \begin_layout Standard
31493 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31496 \begin_inset space ~
31501 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31502 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31504 For the example given, you can insert
31508 in this field for the
31509 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31516 will be located before
31517 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31523 \begin_layout Standard
31524 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31529 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31539 \begin_layout Subsection
31540 Nomenclature Options
31541 \begin_inset Index idx
31544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31545 Nomenclature ! Options
31551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31553 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31560 \begin_layout Standard
31565 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31566 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31569 \begin_layout Description
31570 refeq Appends the phrase
31571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31586 to every nomenclature entry, where
31592 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31595 \begin_layout Description
31596 refpage Appends the phrase
31597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31612 to every nomenclature entry, where
31618 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31621 \begin_layout Description
31622 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31625 \begin_layout Standard
31626 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31627 class options list in the
31629 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31633 In this document the options
31640 \begin_layout Standard
31641 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31647 \begin_layout Standard
31648 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31649 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31654 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31657 \begin_layout Description
31667 \begin_layout Description
31670 nomrefpage Like the
31677 \begin_layout Description
31680 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31689 \begin_layout Description
31693 \begin_inset space ~
31699 \begin_inset space ~
31704 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31707 \begin_layout Standard
31709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31716 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31717 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31721 \begin_layout Standard
31730 \begin_inset Newline newline
31736 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31740 \begin_inset space ~
31752 unskip, see equation
31755 \begin_inset Newline newline
31762 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31763 \begin_inset Newline newline
31769 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31773 \begin_inset space ~
31790 \begin_layout Standard
31791 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31794 \begin_inset space ~
31799 in the document settings under
31802 \begin_inset space ~
31810 \begin_layout Standard
31818 \begin_inset Newline newline
31822 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31826 \begin_inset space ~
31838 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
31840 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
31841 \begin_inset Newline newline
31848 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31849 \begin_inset Newline newline
31853 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31857 \begin_inset space ~
31869 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
31874 \begin_layout Subsection
31875 Printing the Nomenclature
31876 \begin_inset Index idx
31879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31880 Nomenclature ! Printing
31888 \begin_layout Standard
31889 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31891 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31892 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31908 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31909 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31910 You can choose between these settings:
31913 \begin_layout Description
31914 Default a space of 1
31915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31921 \begin_layout Description
31923 \begin_inset space ~
31927 \begin_inset space ~
31930 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31933 \begin_layout Description
31934 Custom custom space
31937 \begin_layout Standard
31938 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31947 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31955 For example, in order to change the name to
31959 , add the following line to the preamble:
31962 \begin_layout Standard
31975 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
31978 \begin_layout Standard
31979 When you are using another document language than English, replace
31980 \begin_inset Newline newline
31995 , where *** is the name of the language used.
31998 \begin_layout Subsection
31999 Nomenclature Program
32000 \begin_inset Index idx
32003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32004 Nomenclature ! Program
32010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32012 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32019 \begin_layout Standard
32025 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32026 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32028 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32033 by adding options, see section
32034 \begin_inset space ~
32038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32040 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32045 The available options are listed and explained in
32046 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32048 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32056 \begin_layout Section
32058 \begin_inset Index idx
32061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32068 \begin_inset Index idx
32071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32072 Document ! Branches
32078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32080 name "sec:Branches"
32087 \begin_layout Standard
32088 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32089 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32090 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32091 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32094 \begin_layout Standard
32095 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32096 allows you to put text into branches.
32097 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32098 To create a branch, either select the menu
32100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32101 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32104 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32113 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32114 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32115 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32116 and whether the name of the branch should
32117 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32118 (see below for an example).
32119 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32120 to the name of the other) and to add
32121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32133 \begin_inset space ~
32136 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32137 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32140 \begin_layout Standard
32141 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32142 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32147 where you can choose a branch.
32148 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32152 \begin_layout Standard
32153 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32154 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32157 \begin_layout Standard
32158 \begin_inset Branch Question
32162 \begin_layout Standard
32167 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32175 \begin_layout Standard
32176 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32180 \begin_layout Standard
32185 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32193 \begin_layout Standard
32200 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32201 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32204 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32205 Consider for example a file
32206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32213 which has the above branches.
32215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32222 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32246 branch were inactive,
32247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32262 branch was active, likewise
32263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32278 branch was active, and
32279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32282 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32286 if both branches were active.
32287 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32288 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32294 \begin_layout Standard
32295 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32301 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32302 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32306 \begin_inset space ~
32314 \begin_layout Standard
32315 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32319 \begin_layout Standard
32325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32332 branch is deactivated.
32338 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32344 \begin_layout Standard
32345 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32346 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32347 definitions for each branch.
32348 For example you can define for the question branch
32352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32353 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32354 -syntax, see section
32355 \begin_inset space ~
32359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32361 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32373 \begin_layout Standard
32383 \begin_layout Standard
32393 \begin_layout Standard
32394 and for the answer branch
32397 \begin_layout Standard
32407 \begin_layout Standard
32417 \begin_layout Standard
32418 \begin_inset Branch Question
32422 \begin_layout Standard
32426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32454 \begin_layout Standard
32455 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32459 \begin_layout Standard
32463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32491 \begin_layout Standard
32492 Now it is possible to use the
32496 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32503 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32506 commands to obtain conditional output.
32507 Here is an example formula where only the
32514 \begin_inset Formula
32516 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32524 \begin_layout Standard
32525 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32533 \begin_layout Standard
32534 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32540 \begin_inset space \space{}
32543 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32545 For this advanced usage, see the
32551 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32556 \begin_layout Section
32558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32560 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32565 \begin_inset Index idx
32568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32577 \begin_layout Standard
32580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32581 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32584 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32586 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32592 \begin_inset Index idx
32595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32597 packages ! hyperref
32602 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32603 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32604 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32605 part of the document.
32609 \begin_layout Standard
32610 The header information in the dialog tab
32614 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32615 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32616 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32617 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32621 \begin_inset space ~
32625 \begin_inset space ~
32630 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32631 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32632 and author entries.
32636 \begin_inset space ~
32640 \begin_inset space ~
32644 \begin_inset space ~
32649 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32652 \begin_layout Standard
32653 You can specify in the dialog tab
32657 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32662 \begin_inset space ~
32666 \begin_inset space ~
32670 \begin_inset space ~
32675 option allows long links to be split;
32678 \begin_inset space ~
32682 \begin_inset space ~
32686 \begin_inset space ~
32694 \begin_inset space ~
32699 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32702 \begin_inset space ~
32707 colors the different links.
32708 The default colors are:
32711 \begin_layout Labeling
32712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32717 for hyperlinks and URLs
32720 \begin_layout Labeling
32721 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32729 \begin_layout Labeling
32730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32738 \begin_layout Standard
32739 but you can change these in the field
32744 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32747 \begin_layout Standard
32750 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32758 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32759 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32760 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32763 \begin_layout Standard
32768 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32769 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32770 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32780 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32781 when opening the PDF.
32783 \begin_inset space ~
32786 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32787 \begin_inset space ~
32790 1 will only display the sections.
32793 \begin_layout Standard
32794 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32795 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32801 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32802 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32812 \begin_layout Section
32814 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32818 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32825 \begin_layout Subsection
32828 \begin_inset Index idx
32831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32841 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32848 \begin_layout Standard
32849 As \SpecialChar LyX
32850 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32851 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32852 commands and constructs,
32855 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32856 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32857 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32858 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32859 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32860 cannot support all packages and
32864 \begin_layout Standard
32865 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32866 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32867 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32871 Code box is created by the menu
32873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32875 \begin_inset space ~
32880 or by the toolbar button
32893 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32901 \begin_layout Standard
32902 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32904 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32906 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32911 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32916 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32923 , you can write the command part
32929 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32930 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32934 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32935 Code box behind the word.
32936 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32937 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32941 \begin_layout Standard
32942 \begin_inset Graphics
32943 filename clipart/ERT.png
32951 \begin_layout Standard
32955 \begin_layout Standard
32956 This is a line with a
32960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32983 \begin_layout Standard
32984 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32992 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32993 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32994 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32995 know that the command is finished.
33003 \begin_layout Subsection
33004 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33006 \begin_inset Argument 1
33009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33010 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33017 \begin_inset Index idx
33020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33030 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33037 \begin_layout Standard
33038 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33039 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33040 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33041 uses in the background.
33042 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33043 is based on commands, you can
33044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33052 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33053 any time if you know the right commands.
33054 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33055 is the end of the day.
33056 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33057 all caption labels bold.
33058 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33060 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33064 \begin_layout Standard
33065 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33067 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33069 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33072 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33083 As result you find that the package
33088 \begin_inset Index idx
33091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33099 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33104 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33108 \begin_inset space ~
33116 \begin_layout Standard
33121 usepackage[options]{package name}
33124 \begin_layout Standard
33125 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33126 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33127 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33128 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33131 \begin_layout Standard
33132 In your case the package name is
33137 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33142 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33143 So you add the command
33146 \begin_layout Standard
33151 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33154 \begin_layout Standard
33155 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33160 For more commands provided by the
33164 package, have a look at its documentation,
33165 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33181 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33183 For example if you use a
33187 class, you don't need the package
33191 , you can instead write
33194 \begin_layout Standard
33199 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33204 \begin_layout Standard
33205 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33206 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33207 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33214 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33217 \begin_layout Standard
33218 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33219 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33221 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33222 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33223 Code box as described in the previous
33227 \begin_layout Standard
33228 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33229 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33232 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33234 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33242 \begin_layout Standard
33243 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33249 \begin_layout Standard
33253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33263 \begin_inset Note Note
33266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33267 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33275 \begin_layout Left Header
33276 \begin_inset Argument 1
33279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33299 \begin_inset Note Note
33302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33303 defines the header line as described below
33311 \begin_layout Center Header
33312 \begin_inset Argument 1
33315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33324 \begin_layout Right Header
33325 \begin_inset Argument 1
33328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33349 \begin_layout Left Footer
33350 \begin_inset Argument 1
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 \begin_layout Center Footer
33375 \begin_inset Argument 1
33378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33390 \begin_inset Newline newline
33394 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33400 \begin_layout Right Footer
33401 \begin_inset Argument 1
33404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33426 \begin_layout Section
33427 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33430 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33435 \begin_inset Index idx
33438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 Document ! Header/Footer line
33445 \begin_inset Index idx
33448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33457 \begin_layout Standard
33458 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33462 \begin_inset space ~
33473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33479 \begin_inset space ~
33485 As a second step add in the menu
33487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33497 Custom Header/Footerlines
33500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33504 This module offers the following 6
33505 \begin_inset space ~
33511 \begin_layout Description
33513 \begin_inset space ~
33517 \begin_inset space ~
33521 \begin_inset space ~
33525 \begin_inset space ~
33529 \begin_inset space ~
33535 \begin_layout Description
33537 \begin_inset space ~
33541 \begin_inset space ~
33545 \begin_inset space ~
33549 \begin_inset space ~
33553 \begin_inset space ~
33559 \begin_layout Standard
33560 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33561 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33564 \begin_layout Standard
33565 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33566 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33568 \begin_inset space ~
33572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33574 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33578 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33581 \begin_layout Standard
33582 \begin_inset Float figure
33588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33591 \begin_inset Tabular
33592 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33593 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33594 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33596 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33598 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33616 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33627 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33645 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33656 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33660 The normal text on the page goes here.
33661 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33663 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33664 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33669 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33678 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33689 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33707 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33736 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33754 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33759 name "fig:Page-layout"
33763 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33776 \begin_layout Standard
33777 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33785 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33789 \begin_inset space ~
33794 is set to “Default”.
33795 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33804 \begin_layout Subsection
33808 \begin_layout Standard
33809 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33810 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33811 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33812 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33814 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33816 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33819 \begin_layout Standard
33820 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33821 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33825 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33827 \begin_inset space ~
33835 \begin_layout Description
33838 thepage prints the current page number
33841 \begin_layout Description
33844 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33847 \begin_layout Description
33850 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33853 \begin_layout Description
33856 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33857 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33864 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33867 because it usually goes in a left header.
33870 \begin_layout Description
33873 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33874 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33876 It is normally used in the right header.
33879 \begin_layout Subsection
33880 Default header/footer
33883 \begin_layout Standard
33884 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33885 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33886 footer has the page number.
33887 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33888 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33889 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33892 \begin_inset space ~
33900 \begin_layout Subsection
33904 \begin_layout Standard
33905 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33906 Some pages are different.
33907 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33908 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33909 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33910 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33911 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33914 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33915 Header and footer decoration line
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33919 By default, you get a 0.4
33920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33923 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33924 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33936 in the following way:
33939 \begin_layout Standard
33946 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33949 \begin_layout Standard
33950 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33963 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33970 \begin_layout Standard
33971 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33973 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33974 \begin_inset space ~
33978 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33988 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33989 Several header/footer lines
33992 \begin_layout Standard
33993 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33994 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33995 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33997 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34013 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34015 \begin_inset space ~
34023 \begin_layout Standard
34030 headheight}{height}
34033 \begin_layout Standard
34038 is a size in standard units (e.
34039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34043 \begin_inset space \space{}
34051 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34052 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34053 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34054 logfile with the menu
34056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34066 \begin_inset space ~
34071 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34076 \begin_inset Index idx
34079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34081 packages ! fancyhdr
34087 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34088 for your header/footer.
34091 \begin_layout Subsection
34095 \begin_layout Standard
34096 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34097 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34098 This example consists of the following definition:
34101 \begin_layout Description
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34112 , empty optional argument
34115 \begin_layout Description
34117 \begin_inset space ~
34120 Header empty, empty optional argument
34123 \begin_layout Description
34125 \begin_inset space ~
34134 in the optional argument
34137 \begin_layout Description
34139 \begin_inset space ~
34148 in the optional argument
34151 \begin_layout Description
34153 \begin_inset space ~
34166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34170 \begin_inset Newline newline
34174 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34181 in the optional argument
34184 \begin_layout Description
34186 \begin_inset space ~
34195 , empty optional argument
34198 \begin_layout Description
34201 headrulewidth set to 2
34202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34208 \begin_layout Standard
34209 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34210 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34216 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34226 \begin_layout Standard
34227 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34233 \begin_layout Standard
34237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34241 pagestyle{headings}
34247 \begin_inset Note Note
34250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34251 switches back to page style with the default headings
34259 \begin_layout Section
34260 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34263 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34268 \begin_inset Index idx
34271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34278 \begin_inset Index idx
34281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34290 \begin_layout Standard
34292 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34293 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34294 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34297 \begin_layout Subsection
34301 \begin_layout Standard
34302 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34308 \begin_inset Index idx
34311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34313 packages ! preview-latex
34318 (on some systems named simply
34323 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34325 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34332 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34334 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34342 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34343 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34344 -package are automatically
34345 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34349 \begin_layout Subsection
34353 \begin_layout Standard
34354 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34355 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34357 activate the option
34360 \begin_inset space ~
34367 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34373 \begin_inset space ~
34377 \begin_inset space ~
34380 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34387 \begin_inset space ~
34400 \begin_inset space ~
34405 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34408 \begin_layout Standard
34409 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34414 \begin_inset space ~
34422 \begin_inset space ~
34430 \begin_layout Standard
34431 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34432 and when you finish
34436 \begin_layout Standard
34437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34445 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34446 generated by activating the option
34449 \begin_inset space ~
34455 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34463 \begin_layout Subsection
34464 Selected document parts
34467 \begin_layout Standard
34468 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34469 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34470 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34471 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34473 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34479 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34480 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34481 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34484 \begin_layout Standard
34485 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34492 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34504 is explained in section
34506 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34511 \begin_inset space ~
34521 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34522 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34523 the final rotated boxes,
34524 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34525 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34527 Here is the result:
34530 \begin_layout Standard
34531 \begin_inset Preview
34533 \begin_layout Standard
34538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34542 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34548 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34558 height_special "totalheight"
34563 backgroundcolor "none"
34566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34591 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34597 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34619 \begin_layout Standard
34620 Previewing works also for colors.
34621 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34640 is explained in section
34647 \begin_inset space ~
34660 \begin_layout Standard
34661 \begin_inset Preview
34663 \begin_layout Standard
34667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34686 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34691 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34710 \begin_layout Standard
34711 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34717 \begin_layout Standard
34718 If \SpecialChar LyX
34719 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34720 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34721 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34722 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34723 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34724 the \SpecialChar TeX
34726 If \SpecialChar LyX
34727 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34728 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34730 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34731 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34732 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34735 \begin_layout Subsection
34740 \begin_layout Standard
34741 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34742 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34745 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34747 \begin_inset space ~
34752 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34754 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34756 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34757 's main window, then only this selection
34758 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34759 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34760 the source view window.
34765 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34766 ; but note that if you have
34767 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34769 not just the one which is open at the time.
34772 \begin_layout Section
34773 Advanced Find and Replace
34774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34776 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34781 \begin_inset Index idx
34784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34791 \begin_inset Index idx
34794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34803 \begin_layout Subsection
34807 \begin_layout Standard
34808 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34809 allows for searching of complex,
34810 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34812 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34813 The key-features are:
34816 \begin_layout Itemize
34817 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34818 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34819 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34823 \begin_layout Itemize
34824 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34825 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34826 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34827 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34830 \begin_layout Itemize
34831 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34832 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34833 outside of mathematics environments
34836 \begin_layout Itemize
34837 Search may be widened to a specific
34842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34849 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34850 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34857 \begin_layout Itemize
34858 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34859 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34864 \begin_inset space ~
34867 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34870 \begin_layout Subsection
34874 \begin_layout Standard
34875 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34877 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34890 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34893 ) or the toolbar button
34896 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34902 Advanced Find and Replace
34907 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34911 \begin_layout Standard
34917 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34921 \begin_inset space ~
34926 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34929 arg "paragraph-break"
34933 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34934 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34938 arg "paragraph-break"
34941 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34945 searches backwards.
34948 \begin_layout Standard
34952 \begin_inset space ~
34957 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34966 \begin_inset space ~
34971 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34975 Searching for mathematics
34978 \begin_layout Standard
34979 Mathematical formulas, such as
34980 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34983 or something more complex like
34984 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34987 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34992 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34993 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34994 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34995 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35005 \begin_layout Standard
35006 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35007 This is done by switching to the
35011 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35016 This way, entering in the
35023 \begin_layout Itemize
35024 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35025 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35028 \begin_layout Itemize
35029 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35030 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35033 \begin_layout Itemize
35034 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35035 of it only within section headings.
35036 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35037 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35041 \begin_layout Itemize
35042 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35043 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35050 \begin_layout Standard
35051 The entries made in the
35055 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35058 \begin_inset space ~
35064 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35068 button or alternatively press
35071 arg "paragraph-break"
35078 while the cursor is in the
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35089 \begin_layout Standard
35090 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35092 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35096 \begin_layout Itemize
35097 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35098 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35106 with its typewriter version
35107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35121 \begin_layout Itemize
35122 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35128 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35140 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35147 (you may want to enable the
35150 \begin_inset space ~
35158 \begin_inset space ~
35163 options and disable the
35171 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35179 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35180 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35184 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35187 , or occurrences of
35188 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35192 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35198 \begin_layout Subsection
35202 \begin_layout Standard
35203 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35208 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35210 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35212 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35222 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35228 This is done with the context menu
35230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35231 Insert Regular Expression
35233 while the cursor is in the
35238 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35239 expression matching rules
35243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35244 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35251 \begin_inset space ~
35254 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35255 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35261 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35262 same text in the document.
35263 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35264 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35267 \begin_layout Enumerate
35268 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35273 editor the fraction
35274 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35278 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35281 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35282 fractions with the given denominator.
35285 \begin_layout Enumerate
35286 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35298 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35303 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35304 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35305 Also, by inserting a
35306 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35309 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35310 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35313 \begin_layout Standard
35314 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35315 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35316 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35319 , and referring back to them through
35320 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35324 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35328 For example, try searching with the regexp
35329 \begin_inset Newline newline
35332 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35335 \begin_inset Newline newline
35338 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35341 \begin_layout Standard
35342 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35345 \begin_layout Standard
35346 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35354 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35355 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35356 sub-expressions is absolute.
35358 \begin_inset space ~
35362 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35365 always refers to the first occurrence of
35366 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35369 in all entered regexps.
35377 \begin_layout Section
35379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35381 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35386 \begin_inset Index idx
35389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35398 \begin_layout Standard
35400 has a built-in spell checker.
35403 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35410 key or the toolbar button
35413 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35416 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35417 beginning of the currently selected text.
35418 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35419 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35420 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35421 scrolled so that it is visible.
35422 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35423 n, if any could be found.
35424 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35428 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35429 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35432 \begin_layout Standard
35433 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35440 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35441 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35443 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35444 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35447 \begin_inset space ~
35455 arg "dialog-show character"
35458 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35460 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35463 \begin_layout Standard
35464 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35465 can be downloaded from here:
35466 \begin_inset Newline newline
35470 \begin_inset Flex URL
35473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35475 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35481 \begin_inset Newline newline
35485 \begin_inset space ~
35488 files for each language.
35489 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35490 \begin_inset space ~
35493 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35494 's installation subfolder
35502 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35504 \begin_inset Newline newline
35507 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35508 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35509 but in most cases these are
35525 is the language code.
35528 \begin_layout Subsection
35532 \begin_layout Standard
35535 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35536 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35538 \begin_inset space ~
35541 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35544 you can set the following things:
35547 \begin_layout Description
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35552 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35553 should use for spell checking.
35554 Depending on your platform,
35564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35565 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35566 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35584 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35587 \begin_layout Description
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35592 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35593 will always use the given language
35594 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35597 \begin_layout Description
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35602 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35608 \begin_inset space \space{}
35612 This should normally not be needed.
35615 \begin_layout Description
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35624 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35636 \begin_layout Description
35638 \begin_inset space ~
35641 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35642 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35643 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35644 appear in a context menu.
35645 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35649 \begin_layout Description
35651 \begin_inset space ~
35655 \begin_inset space ~
35659 \begin_inset space ~
35662 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35666 \begin_layout Section
35668 \begin_inset Index idx
35671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35680 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35687 \begin_layout Standard
35689 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35690 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35700 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35702 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35712 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35714 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35715 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35716 which are available for many languages.
35719 \begin_layout Standard
35720 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35721 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35725 \begin_layout Subsection
35726 Setting up the thesaurus
35729 \begin_layout Standard
35738 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35742 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35747 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35761 For instance, the US English files are named:
35764 \begin_layout Itemize
35768 \begin_layout Itemize
35772 \begin_layout Standard
35781 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35782 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35785 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35786 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35787 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35789 \begin_inset space ~
35794 ) to the path where they are installed.
35798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35799 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35800 ies, typical locations are
35806 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35810 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35814 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35817 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35823 LibreOffice-<Version>
35830 On the Mac, the default location is
35832 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35833 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35834 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35835 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35836 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35837 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35845 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35846 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35847 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35851 \begin_layout Standard
35852 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35853 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35855 \begin_inset Newline newline
35859 \begin_inset Flex URL
35862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35864 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
35872 \begin_layout Standard
35873 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35874 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35876 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35877 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35878 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35880 \begin_inset space ~
35885 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35887 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35888 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35892 \begin_layout Standard
35893 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35895 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35898 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35904 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35907 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35908 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35916 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35917 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35918 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35920 \begin_inset space ~
35925 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35928 \begin_layout Subsection
35929 Using the thesaurus
35932 \begin_layout Standard
35933 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35935 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35938 or the toolbar button
35941 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35944 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35946 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35948 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35949 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35950 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35959 ), related terms (such as
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35971 ), compounds (such as
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35983 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35992 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35995 \begin_layout Standard
35996 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35997 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36001 \begin_layout Standard
36002 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36003 the dictionary, such as the above
36007 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36012 \begin_inset space \space{}
36015 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36016 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36017 For example, looking up the word form
36021 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36026 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36031 \begin_inset space \space{}
36042 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36043 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36044 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36047 \begin_layout Section
36049 \begin_inset Index idx
36052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36059 \begin_inset Index idx
36062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36063 Document ! Change Tracking
36069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36071 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36078 \begin_layout Standard
36079 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36080 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36081 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36082 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36084 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36086 \begin_inset space ~
36089 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36091 \begin_inset space ~
36099 \begin_layout Standard
36100 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36114 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36115 You can change the color in
36117 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36118 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36124 \begin_inset space ~
36129 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36135 \begin_inset Index idx
36138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36139 Color ! Change tracking
36144 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36145 's status bar when the
36146 cursor is in changed text.
36147 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36150 arg "changes-merge"
36156 \begin_layout Standard
36157 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36159 \begin_inset Index idx
36162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36171 \begin_layout Standard
36172 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36178 \begin_layout Standard
36179 \begin_inset Graphics
36180 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36188 \begin_layout Standard
36189 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36195 \begin_layout Standard
36196 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36199 \begin_layout Standard
36200 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36206 \begin_layout Standard
36207 \begin_inset Tabular
36208 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36209 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36210 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36211 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36221 arg "changes-track"
36229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36237 \begin_inset space ~
36240 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36260 arg "changes-output"
36268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36274 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36276 \begin_inset space ~
36279 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36285 \begin_inset space ~
36289 \begin_inset space ~
36298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36319 Jumps to the next change
36325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36334 arg "change-accept"
36342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36348 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36350 \begin_inset space ~
36353 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36355 \begin_inset space ~
36364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36373 arg "change-reject"
36381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36389 \begin_inset space ~
36392 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36412 arg "changes-merge"
36420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36428 \begin_inset space ~
36431 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36433 \begin_inset space ~
36442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36451 arg "all-changes-accept"
36459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36465 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36467 \begin_inset space ~
36470 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36472 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_inset space ~
36485 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36494 arg "all-changes-reject"
36502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36508 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36510 \begin_inset space ~
36513 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36519 \begin_inset space ~
36528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36552 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36554 \begin_inset space ~
36563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36586 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36604 \begin_layout Standard
36605 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36611 \begin_layout Standard
36612 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36632 \begin_layout Standard
36633 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36634 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36635 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36636 the next change after the current cursor position.
36637 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36638 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36639 step to the next change.
36640 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36643 \begin_layout Standard
36644 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36645 to describe a change.
36648 \begin_layout Standard
36649 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36655 \begin_inset Index idx
36658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36666 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36675 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36679 \begin_layout Section
36680 Comparison of Documents
36681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36683 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36688 \begin_inset Index idx
36691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36692 Comparison of documents
36700 \begin_layout Standard
36701 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36704 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36708 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36709 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36711 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36713 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36717 \begin_inset space ~
36721 \begin_inset space ~
36725 \begin_inset space ~
36734 \begin_inset space ~
36738 \begin_inset space ~
36742 \begin_inset space ~
36746 \begin_inset space ~
36750 \begin_inset space ~
36754 \begin_inset space ~
36759 enables the change tracking option
36762 \begin_inset space ~
36766 \begin_inset space ~
36770 \begin_inset space ~
36775 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36778 \begin_layout Section
36779 International Support
36780 \begin_inset Index idx
36783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36784 International support
36792 \begin_layout Standard
36793 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36794 with any language you want.
36795 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36796 up \SpecialChar LyX
36798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36800 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36808 \begin_layout Standard
36809 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36810 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36817 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36824 \begin_layout Subsection
36826 \begin_inset Index idx
36829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36836 \begin_inset Index idx
36839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36840 Document ! Settings
36846 \begin_inset Index idx
36849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36850 Document ! Language
36858 \begin_layout Standard
36861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36862 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36865 dialog lets you set
36867 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36877 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36887 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36888 For details about the different encoding options see section
36889 \begin_inset space ~
36893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36895 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36902 \begin_layout Subsection
36903 Keyboard mapping configuration
36904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36906 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36913 \begin_layout Standard
36914 If you have for example a U.
36915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36918 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36919 can use an alternate keymap.
36920 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36925 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36926 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36927 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36930 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36931 \begin_inset space ~
36935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36937 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36942 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36943 which one you want to use.
36946 \begin_layout Standard
36947 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36948 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36949 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36953 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36954 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36955 one to support the characters you want.
36956 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36963 \begin_layout Chapter
36966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36968 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36975 \begin_layout Standard
36976 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36977 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36978 topic inside the user's guide.
36981 \begin_layout Section
36983 \begin_inset Index idx
36986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36995 \begin_layout Standard
37000 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 Creates a new document.
37011 \begin_layout Subsection
37015 \begin_layout Standard
37016 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37017 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37018 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37021 \begin_layout Subsection
37025 \begin_layout Standard
37029 \begin_layout Subsection
37033 \begin_layout Standard
37034 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37035 Click there on a file to open it.
37038 \begin_layout Subsection
37042 \begin_layout Standard
37043 Closes the current document.
37046 \begin_layout Subsection
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 Closes all opened documents.
37054 \begin_layout Subsection
37058 \begin_layout Standard
37059 Saves the actual document.
37062 \begin_layout Subsection
37066 \begin_layout Standard
37067 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37070 \begin_layout Subsection
37074 \begin_layout Standard
37075 Saves all opened documents.
37078 \begin_layout Subsection
37082 \begin_layout Standard
37083 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37086 \begin_layout Subsection
37090 \begin_layout Standard
37091 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37092 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37093 It is described in the section
37095 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37100 Additional Features
37105 \begin_layout Subsection
37109 \begin_layout Standard
37110 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37111 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37113 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37114 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37118 \begin_layout Standard
37119 When using the menu entry
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37127 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37135 \begin_inset space ~
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37144 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37145 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37148 \begin_layout Subsection
37150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37152 name "subsec:Export"
37159 \begin_layout Standard
37160 You can export your document to various file formats.
37161 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37163 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37164 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37165 during its configuration.
37168 \begin_layout Standard
37169 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37171 \begin_inset space ~
37175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37177 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37184 \begin_layout Description
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37193 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37195 \begin_inset space ~
37198 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37199 \begin_inset Newline newline
37202 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37203 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37207 \begin_layout Description
37208 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37214 \begin_layout Description
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37219 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37225 \begin_layout Description
37226 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37227 's native DVI-format.
37228 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37229 files paths or file names in your document.
37231 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37238 \begin_layout Description
37239 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37240 in files paths or file names
37243 \begin_layout Description
37245 \begin_inset space ~
37252 ) DVI-format using the program
37254 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37257 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37261 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37269 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37277 \begin_layout Description
37279 \begin_inset space ~
37282 (cropped) the same as
37286 but with cropped page margins.
37289 \begin_layout Description
37291 \begin_inset space ~
37294 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37298 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37303 \begin_layout Description
37307 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37315 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37323 \begin_layout Description
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37329 \begin_inset space ~
37332 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37336 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37344 \begin_layout Description
37348 \begin_inset space ~
37357 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37358 source that is compilable with the program
37360 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37364 \begin_layout Description
37368 \begin_inset space ~
37373 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37374 source, additionally all images used in the document
37375 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37379 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37382 \begin_layout Description
37386 \begin_inset space ~
37391 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37392 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37393 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37401 \begin_layout Description
37405 \begin_inset space ~
37414 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37415 source that is compilable with the program
37421 \begin_layout Description
37423 \begin_inset space ~
37427 \begin_inset space ~
37434 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37435 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37441 \begin_layout Description
37443 \begin_inset space ~
37446 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37447 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37453 \begin_inset space \space{}
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37477 represent the version number)
37480 \begin_layout Description
37482 \begin_inset space ~
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37489 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37490 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37491 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37495 \begin_layout Description
37496 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37497 's internal XHTML engine
37500 \begin_layout Description
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37510 \begin_inset space ~
37514 \begin_inset space ~
37517 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37522 For the conversion the program
37531 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37534 \begin_layout Description
37535 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37540 \begin_layout Description
37542 \begin_inset space ~
37545 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37547 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37550 For the conversion the program
37559 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37562 \begin_layout Description
37564 \begin_inset space ~
37567 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37568 For the conversion the program
37577 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37580 \begin_layout Description
37582 \begin_inset space ~
37585 (cropped) the same as
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37593 but with cropped page margins
37596 \begin_layout Description
37600 \begin_inset space ~
37605 PDF-format using the program
37609 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37612 \begin_layout Description
37616 \begin_inset space ~
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37633 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37638 \begin_inset space \space{}
37641 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37645 \begin_layout Description
37649 \begin_inset space ~
37654 PDF-format using the program
37656 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37659 , produces PDF-files directly
37662 \begin_layout Description
37666 \begin_inset space ~
37671 PDF-format using the program
37675 , produces PDF-files directly
37678 \begin_layout Description
37682 \begin_inset space ~
37687 PDF-format using the program
37691 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37694 \begin_layout Description
37698 \begin_inset space ~
37703 PDF-format using the program
37708 , produces PDF-files directly
37711 \begin_layout Description
37715 \begin_inset space ~
37723 \begin_layout Description
37727 \begin_inset space ~
37731 \begin_inset space ~
37736 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37737 and then exported as text using the program
37742 \begin_layout Description
37747 PostScript format using the program
37755 options see section
37756 \begin_inset space ~
37760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37762 reference "subsec:General-output"
37769 \begin_layout Description
37770 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37771 source and also code in the statistical programming
37785 it is possible to use
37789 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37793 \begin_layout Standard
37794 If one of the menu entries
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37810 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37812 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37814 \begin_inset space ~
37818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37820 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37825 \begin_inset Index idx
37828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37829 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37838 \begin_layout Subsection
37842 \begin_layout Standard
37843 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37844 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37847 \begin_inset space ~
37851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37853 reference "sec:Paths"
37858 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37867 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37868 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37869 's preferences as described in section
37870 \begin_inset space ~
37874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37876 reference "subsec:Converters"
37883 \begin_layout Subsection
37884 New and Close Window
37887 \begin_layout Standard
37888 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37892 \begin_layout Subsection
37896 \begin_layout Standard
37897 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37900 \begin_layout Section
37902 \begin_inset Index idx
37905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37914 \begin_layout Subsection
37918 \begin_layout Standard
37919 Described in section
37920 \begin_inset space ~
37924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37926 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37933 \begin_layout Subsection
37934 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37937 \begin_layout Standard
37938 Described in section
37939 \begin_inset space ~
37943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37945 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37952 \begin_layout Subsection
37956 \begin_layout Standard
37957 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37958 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37961 \begin_layout Subsection
37965 \begin_layout Standard
37966 Selects the whole document.
37969 \begin_layout Subsection
37970 Find & Replace (Quick)
37973 \begin_layout Standard
37974 Described in section
37975 \begin_inset space ~
37979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37981 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37988 \begin_layout Subsection
37989 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37992 \begin_layout Standard
37993 Described in section
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38000 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38007 \begin_layout Subsection
38008 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38012 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38016 \begin_layout Subsection
38020 \begin_layout Standard
38021 Described in section
38022 \begin_inset space ~
38026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38028 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38035 \begin_layout Subsection
38037 \begin_inset Index idx
38040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38041 Paragraph ! Settings
38049 \begin_layout Standard
38050 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38051 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38055 \begin_layout Standard
38056 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38057 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38064 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38066 \begin_inset space ~
38074 \begin_layout Subsection
38075 Table and Rows & Columns
38078 \begin_layout Standard
38079 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38080 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38081 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38084 \begin_layout Subsection
38088 \begin_layout Standard
38089 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38090 It will dissolve this inset.
38091 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38095 \begin_layout Subsection
38099 \begin_layout Standard
38100 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38101 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38104 \begin_layout Subsection
38105 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38108 \begin_layout Standard
38109 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38111 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38118 reference "sec:Nesting"
38123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38125 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38132 \begin_layout Section
38134 \begin_inset Index idx
38137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38146 \begin_layout Standard
38147 At the bottom of the
38151 menu the opened documents are listed.
38154 \begin_layout Subsection
38155 Open/Close all Insets
38158 \begin_layout Standard
38159 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38162 \begin_layout Subsection
38163 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38166 \begin_layout Standard
38167 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38170 \begin_layout Standard
38171 Math macros are described in the
38178 \begin_layout Subsection
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38183 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38184 \begin_inset space ~
38188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38190 reference "sec:Navigating"
38195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38197 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38204 \begin_layout Subsection
38208 \begin_layout Standard
38209 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38211 \begin_inset space ~
38215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38217 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38224 \begin_layout Subsection
38228 \begin_layout Standard
38229 Opens a window showing console messages.
38230 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38235 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38236 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38237 is processing the document.
38240 \begin_layout Subsection
38242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38244 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38249 \begin_inset Index idx
38252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38261 \begin_layout Standard
38262 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38264 All toolbars and the
38267 \begin_inset space ~
38272 can be turned on and off.
38277 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38289 \begin_inset space ~
38301 \begin_inset space ~
38306 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38310 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38317 \begin_layout Standard
38322 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38326 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38327 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38328 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38329 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38330 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38333 \begin_layout Standard
38335 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38336 \begin_inset space ~
38340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38342 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38349 \begin_layout Subsection
38353 \begin_layout Standard
38357 \begin_inset space ~
38361 \begin_inset space ~
38365 \begin_inset space ~
38369 \begin_inset space ~
38373 \begin_inset space ~
38377 \begin_inset space ~
38382 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38383 's main window vertically while
38386 \begin_inset space ~
38390 \begin_inset space ~
38394 \begin_inset space ~
38398 \begin_inset space ~
38402 \begin_inset space ~
38406 \begin_inset space ~
38411 will split it horizontally.
38412 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38413 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38414 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38415 three or more documents at the same time.
38416 To close a split view, use the menu
38419 \begin_inset space ~
38423 \begin_inset space ~
38431 \begin_layout Subsection
38435 \begin_layout Standard
38436 Closes a split view.
38439 \begin_layout Subsection
38443 \begin_layout Standard
38444 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38445 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38446 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38447 's main window fullscreen.
38448 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38449 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38452 \begin_layout Section
38454 \begin_inset Index idx
38457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38466 \begin_layout Subsection
38470 \begin_layout Standard
38471 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38472 \begin_inset space ~
38476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38478 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38489 \begin_layout Subsection
38491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38493 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38500 \begin_layout Standard
38501 Here you can insert the following characters:
38504 \begin_layout Description
38509 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38512 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38513 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38514 -packages you have installed.
38515 You can get a complete display by checking
38518 \begin_inset space ~
38524 \begin_inset Newline newline
38528 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38536 Not all characters will be visible in the
38540 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38541 dialog (see section
38542 \begin_inset space ~
38546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38548 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38552 ) can display every character.
38560 \begin_layout Description
38561 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38565 \begin_layout Description
38567 \begin_inset space ~
38571 \begin_inset space ~
38574 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38575 \begin_inset space ~
38579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38581 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38588 \begin_layout Description
38590 \begin_inset space ~
38593 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38597 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38603 \begin_layout Description
38605 \begin_inset space ~
38608 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38612 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38618 \begin_layout Description
38620 \begin_inset space ~
38623 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38627 \begin_layout Description
38629 \begin_inset space ~
38632 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38636 \begin_layout Description
38638 \begin_inset space ~
38641 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38647 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38653 \begin_layout Description
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38658 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38662 \begin_layout Description
38664 \begin_inset space ~
38668 \begin_inset Index idx
38671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38678 \begin_inset Index idx
38681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38682 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38687 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38688 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38690 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38696 \begin_inset Index idx
38699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38707 \begin_inset Newline newline
38710 More information about this feature can be found in the
38716 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38722 \begin_layout Description
38723 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38725 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38726 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38730 \begin_layout Subsection
38734 \begin_layout Standard
38735 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38738 \begin_layout Description
38739 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38740 \begin_inset script superscript
38742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38751 \begin_layout Description
38752 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38753 \begin_inset script subscript
38755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38764 \begin_layout Description
38766 \begin_inset space ~
38769 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38770 \begin_inset space ~
38774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38776 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38783 \begin_layout Description
38785 \begin_inset space ~
38788 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38789 \begin_inset space ~
38793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38795 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38802 \begin_layout Description
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38807 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38808 \begin_inset space ~
38812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38814 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38821 \begin_layout Description
38823 \begin_inset space ~
38826 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38832 \begin_inset space \space{}
38835 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38836 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38845 To insert a fraction use the command
38850 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38854 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38863 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38870 \begin_layout Description
38872 \begin_inset space ~
38875 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38876 \begin_inset space ~
38880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38882 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38889 \begin_layout Description
38891 \begin_inset space ~
38894 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38895 \begin_inset space ~
38899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38901 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38908 \begin_layout Description
38910 \begin_inset space ~
38913 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38914 \begin_inset space ~
38918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38920 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38927 \begin_layout Description
38928 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38929 \begin_inset space ~
38933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38935 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38942 \begin_layout Description
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38947 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38954 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38961 \begin_layout Description
38963 \begin_inset space ~
38966 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38967 \begin_inset space ~
38971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38973 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38980 \begin_layout Description
38982 \begin_inset space ~
38986 \begin_inset space ~
38989 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38992 \begin_inset space ~
38996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38998 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
39005 for a usage example.
39008 \begin_layout Description
39010 \begin_inset space ~
39014 \begin_inset space ~
39017 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39018 \begin_inset space ~
39022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39024 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39031 \begin_layout Description
39033 \begin_inset space ~
39036 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39037 as described in section
39038 \begin_inset space ~
39042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39044 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39051 \begin_layout Description
39053 \begin_inset space ~
39056 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39057 \begin_inset space ~
39061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39063 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39070 \begin_layout Description
39072 \begin_inset space ~
39075 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39076 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39084 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39091 \begin_layout Description
39093 \begin_inset space ~
39096 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39097 \begin_inset space ~
39101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39103 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39110 \begin_layout Description
39112 \begin_inset space ~
39116 \begin_inset space ~
39119 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39120 \begin_inset space ~
39124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39126 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39133 \begin_layout Subsection
39137 \begin_layout Standard
39138 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39142 \begin_inset space ~
39163 are described in section
39164 \begin_inset space ~
39168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39170 reference "sec:toc"
39179 is described in section
39180 \begin_inset space ~
39184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39186 reference "sec:Index"
39194 is described in section
39195 \begin_inset space ~
39199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39201 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39207 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39210 is described in section
39211 \begin_inset space ~
39215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39217 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39224 \begin_layout Subsection
39228 \begin_layout Standard
39229 To insert floats, as described in section
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39236 reference "sec:Floats"
39240 and in detail the chapter
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39255 \begin_layout Subsection
39259 \begin_layout Standard
39260 To insert notes, described in section
39261 \begin_inset space ~
39265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39267 reference "sec:Notes"
39274 \begin_layout Subsection
39278 \begin_layout Standard
39279 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39281 Branches are described in section
39282 \begin_inset space ~
39286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39288 reference "sec:Branches"
39295 \begin_layout Subsection
39299 \begin_layout Standard
39300 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39301 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39303 An example is the document class
39304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39311 with three custom insets.
39314 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39318 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39324 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39327 \begin_layout Subsection
39329 \begin_inset Index idx
39332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39341 \begin_layout Standard
39342 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39344 For more information see chapter
39346 External Document Parts
39349 \begin_inset space ~
39355 \begin_layout Subsection
39357 \begin_inset Index idx
39360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39369 \begin_layout Standard
39370 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39371 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39378 \begin_inset space ~
39386 \begin_layout Subsection
39390 \begin_layout Standard
39395 dialog as described in section
39396 \begin_inset space ~
39400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39402 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39409 \begin_layout Subsection
39413 \begin_layout Standard
39418 as described in section
39419 \begin_inset space ~
39423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39425 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39432 \begin_layout Subsection
39436 \begin_layout Standard
39441 as described in section
39442 \begin_inset space ~
39446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39448 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39455 \begin_layout Subsection
39457 \begin_inset Index idx
39460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39467 \begin_inset Index idx
39470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39479 \begin_layout Standard
39480 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39481 Floats are described in section
39482 \begin_inset space ~
39486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39488 reference "sec:Floats"
39492 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39494 Multi-page Captions
39499 \begin_inset space ~
39507 \begin_layout Subsection
39511 \begin_layout Standard
39512 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39513 \begin_inset space ~
39517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39519 reference "sec:Index"
39526 \begin_layout Subsection
39530 \begin_layout Standard
39531 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39532 \begin_inset space ~
39536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39538 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39545 \begin_layout Subsection
39549 \begin_layout Standard
39550 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39551 Tables are described in section
39552 \begin_inset space ~
39556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39558 reference "sec:Tables"
39562 and in detail in the chapter
39569 \begin_inset space ~
39577 \begin_layout Subsection
39581 \begin_layout Standard
39587 Graphics are described in section
39588 \begin_inset space ~
39592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39594 reference "sec:Graphics"
39601 \begin_layout Subsection
39605 \begin_layout Standard
39606 Inserts a URL as described in section
39607 \begin_inset space ~
39611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39613 reference "subsec:URLs"
39620 \begin_layout Subsection
39624 \begin_layout Standard
39625 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39626 \begin_inset space ~
39630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39632 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39639 \begin_layout Subsection
39643 \begin_layout Standard
39644 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39645 \begin_inset space ~
39649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39651 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39658 \begin_layout Subsection
39662 \begin_layout Standard
39663 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39670 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39677 \begin_layout Subsection
39680 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
39683 \begin_layout Standard
39684 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
39685 environments of the same type.
39687 \begin_inset space ~
39691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39693 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
39697 for an explanation.
39700 \begin_layout Subsection
39704 \begin_layout Standard
39705 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39706 title or caption of a float.
39707 Inserts a short title as described in section
39708 \begin_inset space ~
39712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39714 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39721 \begin_layout Subsection
39726 \begin_layout Standard
39727 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39728 Code box as described in section
39729 \begin_inset space ~
39733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39735 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39742 \begin_layout Subsection
39744 \begin_inset Index idx
39747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39756 \begin_layout Standard
39757 Inserts a program listings box.
39758 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39760 Program Code Listings
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39773 \begin_layout Subsection
39777 \begin_layout Standard
39778 Inserts the actual date.
39779 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39784 \begin_layout Subsection
39788 \begin_layout Standard
39789 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39790 \begin_inset space ~
39794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39796 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39803 \begin_layout Section
39805 \begin_inset Index idx
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39817 \begin_layout Standard
39818 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39819 \begin_inset space ~
39822 of the current document.
39823 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39826 \begin_layout Subsection
39830 \begin_layout Standard
39831 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39832 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39833 to jump, for example, between section
39834 \begin_inset space ~
39838 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39839 \begin_inset space ~
39842 2.5 and use the submenu
39845 \begin_inset space ~
39849 \begin_inset space ~
39856 \begin_inset space ~
39862 \begin_inset space ~
39866 \begin_inset space ~
39872 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39876 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39882 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39885 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39888 \begin_layout Standard
39889 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39893 \begin_inset space ~
39898 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39901 \begin_inset space ~
39906 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39909 \begin_layout Subsection
39910 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39913 \begin_layout Standard
39914 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39918 \begin_layout Subsection
39922 \begin_layout Standard
39923 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39924 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39925 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39929 \begin_inset space ~
39933 \begin_inset space ~
39941 \begin_layout Subsection
39945 \begin_layout Standard
39946 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39949 The \SpecialChar LyX
39950 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39952 \begin_inset space ~
39960 \begin_inset space ~
39965 manual for a detailed description.
39968 \begin_layout Section
39970 \begin_inset Index idx
39973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39982 \begin_layout Subsection
39986 \begin_layout Standard
39987 Change Tracking is described in section
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39994 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40001 \begin_layout Subsection
40009 \begin_layout Standard
40010 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40011 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40012 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40014 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40015 to the clipboard or update the view.
40016 \begin_inset Newline newline
40019 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40023 \begin_layout Standard
40026 Open Containing Directory
40028 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40029 's temporary folder for the document.
40030 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40031 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40032 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40033 For example some journals require to send the
40037 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40041 \begin_layout Subsection
40042 Start Appendix Here
40045 \begin_layout Standard
40046 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40047 as described in section
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40054 reference "sec:Appendices"
40061 \begin_layout Subsection
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40069 \begin_layout Standard
40070 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40071 default output format for the document (menu
40073 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40074 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40075 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40077 \begin_inset space ~
40081 \begin_inset space ~
40087 \begin_inset space ~
40091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40093 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40097 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40100 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40101 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40106 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40111 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40113 \begin_inset space ~
40117 \begin_inset space ~
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40129 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40133 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40134 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40136 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40137 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40142 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40144 \begin_inset space ~
40147 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40151 \begin_inset space ~
40155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40157 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40162 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40163 when it is first configured.
40164 The default output format is
40167 \begin_inset space ~
40175 \begin_layout Subsection
40176 View (Other Formats)
40179 \begin_layout Standard
40180 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40181 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40182 actual document with an external program.
40183 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40184 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40185 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40187 All possible formats are listed in section
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40194 reference "subsec:Export"
40199 You should at least see the menu entry
40204 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40206 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40208 \begin_inset space ~
40212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40214 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40219 \begin_inset Index idx
40222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40223 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40232 \begin_layout Standard
40233 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40234 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40236 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40237 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40242 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40244 \begin_inset space ~
40247 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40257 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40262 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40263 when it is first configured.
40266 \begin_layout Subsection
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40274 \begin_layout Standard
40275 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40276 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40279 \begin_layout Subsection
40280 Update (Other Formats)
40283 \begin_layout Standard
40284 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40285 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40288 \begin_layout Subsection
40289 View Master Document
40292 \begin_layout Standard
40293 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40314 manual for more information on this topic).
40315 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40316 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40320 \begin_inset space ~
40324 \begin_inset space ~
40329 generates the output of the whole book, while
40333 will just output the chapter alone.
40336 \begin_layout Standard
40337 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40338 in the document settings (menu
40340 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40341 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40342 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40354 \begin_inset space ~
40358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40360 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40364 ) or in the preferences (menu
40366 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40367 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40369 \begin_inset space ~
40372 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40377 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40379 \begin_inset space ~
40383 \begin_inset space ~
40389 \begin_inset space ~
40393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40395 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40402 \begin_layout Subsection
40403 Update Master Document
40406 \begin_layout Standard
40407 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40428 manual for more information on this topic).
40429 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40430 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40433 \begin_layout Standard
40434 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40435 in the document settings (menu
40437 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40438 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40439 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40441 \begin_inset space ~
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40451 \begin_inset space ~
40455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40457 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40461 ) or in the preferences (menu
40463 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40464 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40466 \begin_inset space ~
40469 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40474 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40476 \begin_inset space ~
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40486 \begin_inset space ~
40490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40492 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40499 \begin_layout Subsection
40501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40503 name "subsec:Compressed"
40510 \begin_layout Standard
40511 Un/compresses the current document.
40512 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40513 compression (see the
40515 Additional Features
40517 manual for details).
40520 \begin_layout Subsection
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40525 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40528 \begin_layout Subsection
40532 \begin_layout Standard
40533 The document settings are described in appendix
40534 \begin_inset space ~
40538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40540 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40547 \begin_layout Section
40549 \begin_inset Index idx
40552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40561 \begin_layout Subsection
40565 \begin_layout Standard
40566 Spell checking is explained in section
40567 \begin_inset space ~
40571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40573 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40580 \begin_layout Subsection
40584 \begin_layout Standard
40585 The thesaurus is described in section
40586 \begin_inset space ~
40590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40592 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40599 \begin_layout Subsection
40601 \begin_inset Index idx
40604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40611 \begin_inset Index idx
40614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40623 \begin_layout Standard
40624 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40625 the highlighted document part.
40628 \begin_layout Subsection
40634 \begin_inset Index idx
40637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40638 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40647 \begin_layout Standard
40648 Generates with the help of the program
40650 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40653 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40654 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40655 This feature is not available on Windows.
40658 \begin_layout Subsection
40664 \begin_inset Index idx
40667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40677 \begin_layout Standard
40678 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40683 \begin_inset space ~
40688 to see the full filename paths.
40691 \begin_layout Subsection
40693 \begin_inset Index idx
40696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40705 \begin_layout Standard
40706 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40707 files as described in section
40708 \begin_inset space ~
40712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40714 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40721 \begin_layout Subsection
40723 \begin_inset Index idx
40726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40739 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40757 \begin_inset Index idx
40760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40761 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40770 \begin_layout Standard
40771 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40772 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40773 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40774 -packages and programs it needs; see
40776 \begin_inset space ~
40780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40782 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40789 \begin_layout Subsection
40793 \begin_layout Standard
40798 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40799 \begin_inset space ~
40803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40805 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40812 \begin_layout Section
40814 \begin_inset Index idx
40817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40826 \begin_layout Standard
40827 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40828 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40830 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40834 \begin_layout Standard
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40843 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40844 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40845 packages and classes found
40846 by \SpecialChar LyX
40848 \begin_inset space ~
40852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40854 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40861 \begin_layout Standard
40865 \begin_inset space ~
40870 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40875 \begin_layout Section
40877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40879 name "sec:Toolbars"
40886 \begin_layout Standard
40887 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40888 \begin_inset space ~
40892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40894 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40901 \begin_layout Standard
40902 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40903 This is described in the
40905 Additional Features
40910 \begin_layout Subsection
40912 \begin_inset Index idx
40915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40924 \begin_layout Standard
40925 \begin_inset Graphics
40926 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40934 \begin_layout Standard
40935 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40941 \begin_layout Standard
40942 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40959 \begin_inset Note Note
40962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40963 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40968 manual for more information.
40976 \begin_layout Standard
40977 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40983 \begin_layout Standard
40984 \begin_inset Tabular
40985 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40986 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40987 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40994 \begin_inset Graphics
40995 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41009 pull-down box for the environments
41022 \begin_layout Standard
41023 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41029 \begin_layout Standard
41031 \begin_inset Tabular
41032 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41033 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41034 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41035 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41059 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41066 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41089 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41119 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41135 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41149 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41165 arg "spelling-continuously"
41173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41177 Spellcheck continuously
41183 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41206 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41236 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41243 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41266 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41296 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41342 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41356 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41382 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41396 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41438 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41439 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41467 Emphasize text, function of the
41469 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41474 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41504 Set text to noun style, function of the
41506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41511 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41529 arg "textstyle-apply"
41537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41541 Format text using the current settings in the
41543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41545 \begin_inset space ~
41548 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41580 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41581 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41583 \begin_inset space ~
41592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41601 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41629 arg "tabular-insert"
41637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41643 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41650 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41659 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41671 Toggle outline window on/off,
41673 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41689 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41701 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41707 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41716 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41728 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41741 \begin_layout Subsection
41743 \begin_inset Index idx
41746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41755 \begin_layout Standard
41756 \begin_inset Graphics
41757 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41765 \begin_layout Standard
41766 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41772 \begin_layout Standard
41773 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41777 \begin_layout Standard
41778 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41784 \begin_layout Standard
41785 \begin_inset Tabular
41786 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41787 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41788 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41789 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41817 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41826 arg "layout Enumerate"
41834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41853 arg "layout Itemize"
41861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41907 arg "layout Description"
41915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41934 arg "depth-increment"
41942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41948 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41950 \begin_inset space ~
41954 \begin_inset space ~
41963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41972 arg "depth-decrement"
41980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41986 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41988 \begin_inset space ~
41992 \begin_inset space ~
42001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42010 arg "float-insert figure"
42018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42025 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42041 arg "float-insert table"
42049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42056 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42086 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42102 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42132 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42178 \begin_inset space ~
42187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42196 arg "nomencl-insert"
42204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42212 \begin_inset space ~
42221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42230 arg "footnote-insert"
42238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42260 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42276 \begin_inset space ~
42285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42308 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42309 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42311 \begin_inset space ~
42320 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42329 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42405 \begin_inset space ~
42414 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42423 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42437 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42438 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42445 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42454 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42468 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42469 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42471 \begin_inset space ~
42480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42489 arg "dialog-show character"
42497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42505 \begin_inset space ~
42508 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42524 arg "layout-paragraph"
42532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42540 \begin_inset space ~
42549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42558 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42572 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42586 \begin_layout Subsection
42587 View/Update Toolbar
42588 \begin_inset Index idx
42591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42592 Toolbar ! View / Update
42600 \begin_layout Standard
42601 \begin_inset Graphics
42602 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42609 \begin_layout Standard
42610 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42616 \begin_layout Standard
42617 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42621 \begin_layout Standard
42622 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42628 \begin_layout Standard
42629 \begin_inset Tabular
42630 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42631 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42632 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42633 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42673 arg "buffer-update"
42681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42694 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42703 arg "master-buffer-view"
42711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42719 \begin_inset space ~
42728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42737 arg "master-buffer-update"
42745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42753 \begin_inset space ~
42757 \begin_inset space ~
42766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42775 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42790 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42791 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42792 Synchronize with Output
42798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42822 View (Other Formats)
42828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42835 arg "update-others"
42843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42850 Update (Other Formats)
42863 \begin_layout Standard
42864 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42868 \begin_layout Subsection
42872 \begin_layout Standard
42873 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42874 \begin_inset space ~
42878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42880 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42884 , the table toolbar
42885 \begin_inset Index idx
42888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42897 \begin_inset space ~
42902 manual and the math macro toolbar
42903 \begin_inset Index idx
42906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42919 \begin_layout Chapter
42920 The Document Settings
42921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42923 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42928 \begin_inset Index idx
42931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42932 Document ! Settings
42940 \begin_layout Standard
42944 \begin_inset space ~
42949 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42950 is called with the menu
42952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42956 You can save your document settings as default with the
42958 Save as Document Defaults
42960 button in any dialog.
42961 This will create a template named
42965 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42966 when you create a new document without
42970 \begin_layout Standard
42975 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42976 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42979 \begin_layout Standard
42980 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42981 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42982 to find the one you are looking for.
42983 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42984 the submenus of the dialog.
42986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42990 \begin_inset space \space{}
42994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43001 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43002 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43003 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43006 \begin_layout Section
43010 \begin_layout Standard
43011 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43013 Document classes are described in section
43014 \begin_inset space ~
43018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43020 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43028 \begin_layout Standard
43032 \begin_inset space ~
43037 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43042 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43043 as a layout for a document class.
43044 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43046 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43055 \begin_layout Standard
43056 Some classes use special class options by default.
43057 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43061 and you can decide to use them or not.
43062 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43063 recommended you leave them untouched.
43068 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43069 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43074 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43076 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43082 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43083 \begin_inset Newline newline
43088 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43091 \begin_inset Newline newline
43094 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43095 distribution, see section
43100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43102 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43115 \begin_layout Standard
43120 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43121 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43122 in the background if the child document
43123 is opened without its master.
43124 This way child documents are always compilable.
43125 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43132 \begin_inset space ~
43140 \begin_layout Standard
43141 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43152 \begin_inset Index idx
43155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43157 packages ! prettyref
43163 \begin_inset Index idx
43166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43168 packages ! refstyle
43173 for cross-references, see section
43174 \begin_inset space ~
43178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43180 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43187 \begin_layout Section
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43192 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43193 Please refer to the section
43196 \begin_inset space ~
43204 \begin_inset space ~
43209 manual for details.
43212 \begin_layout Section
43216 \begin_layout Standard
43217 Modules are explained in section
43218 \begin_inset space ~
43222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43224 reference "subsec:Modules"
43231 \begin_layout Section
43235 \begin_layout Standard
43237 \begin_inset space ~
43241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43243 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43250 \begin_layout Section
43254 \begin_layout Standard
43255 The document font settings are described in section
43256 \begin_inset space ~
43260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43262 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43269 \begin_layout Section
43273 \begin_layout Standard
43274 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43286 \begin_inset space ~
43291 and whether it should be a
43294 \begin_inset space ~
43299 can also be specified here.
43302 \begin_layout Standard
43303 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43304 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43305 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43307 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43310 \begin_layout Standard
43313 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43316 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43317 justifies the text on screen.
43318 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43322 \begin_layout Section
43326 \begin_layout Standard
43327 This dialog is described in sections
43328 \begin_inset space ~
43332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43334 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43341 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43348 \begin_layout Section
43352 \begin_layout Standard
43353 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43354 \begin_inset space ~
43358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43360 reference "subsec:Margins"
43367 \begin_layout Section
43369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43371 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43376 \begin_inset Index idx
43379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43380 Language ! Encoding
43388 \begin_layout Standard
43389 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43390 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43391 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43393 is always encoded in utf8).
43394 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43395 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43396 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43397 -command is not known for
43398 a particular character).
43401 \begin_layout Standard
43402 If you use the option
43407 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43408 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43409 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43411 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43412 exactly one encoding.
43413 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43416 \begin_layout Standard
43418 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43419 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43420 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43421 installation supports Unicode), choose
43422 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43423 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43424 is quite incomplete, so
43425 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43430 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43431 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43432 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43433 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43434 -commands is not used, because all
43435 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43436 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43437 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43438 , two new alternative engines
43439 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43441 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43443 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43474 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43479 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43483 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43486 \begin_layout Standard
43490 \begin_inset space ~
43495 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43496 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43506 The possible settings are:
43509 \begin_layout Description
43510 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43512 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43513 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43517 \begin_inset space ~
43521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43523 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43530 \begin_layout Description
43531 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43532 format you will use.
43533 In many cases this will be
43538 \begin_inset Index idx
43541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43549 If the newer package
43554 \begin_inset Index idx
43557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43559 packages ! polyglossia
43564 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43565 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43566 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43568 this package will be used instead of
43575 \begin_layout Description
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43588 would be more appropriate.
43591 \begin_layout Description
43592 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43593 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43597 (for German texts), type in
43600 \begin_inset Newline newline
43605 usepackage{ngerman}
43608 \begin_layout Description
43609 None will not use a language package.
43610 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43613 \begin_layout Standard
43614 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43617 \begin_layout Description
43619 \begin_inset space ~
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43634 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43640 \begin_inset Index idx
43643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43645 packages ! inputenc
43651 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43652 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43653 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43657 \begin_layout Description
43658 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43660 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43661 commands, which may result in a big
43662 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43663 -commands are needed.
43666 \begin_layout Description
43668 \begin_inset space ~
43672 \begin_inset space ~
43675 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43678 \begin_layout Description
43680 \begin_inset space ~
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43687 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43690 \begin_layout Description
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43695 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43698 \begin_layout Description
43700 \begin_inset space ~
43704 \begin_inset space ~
43707 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43708 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43711 \begin_layout Description
43713 \begin_inset space ~
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43720 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43724 \begin_layout Description
43726 \begin_inset space ~
43730 \begin_inset space ~
43733 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43734 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43737 \begin_layout Description
43739 \begin_inset space ~
43743 \begin_inset space ~
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43750 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43751 \begin_inset space ~
43757 \begin_layout Description
43759 \begin_inset space ~
43763 \begin_inset space ~
43767 \begin_inset space ~
43770 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43771 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43774 \begin_layout Description
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43780 \begin_inset space ~
43783 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43784 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43785 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43786 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43797 \begin_layout Description
43799 \begin_inset space ~
43803 \begin_inset space ~
43806 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43807 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43808 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43810 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43811 \begin_inset space ~
43815 \begin_inset space ~
43821 \begin_layout Description
43823 \begin_inset space ~
43827 \begin_inset space ~
43830 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43833 \begin_layout Description
43835 \begin_inset space ~
43839 \begin_inset space ~
43842 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43845 \begin_layout Description
43847 \begin_inset space ~
43851 \begin_inset space ~
43854 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43857 \begin_layout Description
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43862 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43865 \begin_layout Description
43867 \begin_inset space ~
43870 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43873 \begin_layout Description
43875 \begin_inset space ~
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43882 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43885 \begin_layout Description
43887 \begin_inset space ~
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43897 \begin_layout Description
43899 \begin_inset space ~
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43906 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43909 \begin_layout Description
43911 \begin_inset space ~
43915 \begin_inset space ~
43921 \begin_layout Description
43923 \begin_inset space ~
43927 \begin_inset space ~
43930 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43936 \begin_inset Index idx
43939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43946 , when using this, set the document language to
43951 \begin_layout Description
43953 \begin_inset space ~
43957 \begin_inset space ~
43960 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43965 , when using this, set the document language to
43968 \begin_inset space ~
43974 \begin_layout Description
43976 \begin_inset space ~
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43983 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43989 \begin_inset Index idx
43992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43994 packages ! japanese
43999 , when using this, set the document language to
44004 \begin_layout Description
44006 \begin_inset space ~
44010 \begin_inset space ~
44013 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44018 , when using this, set the document language to
44023 \begin_layout Description
44025 \begin_inset space ~
44029 \begin_inset space ~
44032 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44037 , when using this, set the document language to
44042 \begin_layout Description
44044 \begin_inset space ~
44047 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44050 \begin_layout Description
44052 \begin_inset space ~
44056 \begin_inset space ~
44060 \begin_inset space ~
44063 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44066 \begin_layout Description
44068 \begin_inset space ~
44072 \begin_inset space ~
44076 \begin_inset space ~
44079 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44080 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44081 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44084 \begin_layout Description
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44090 \begin_inset space ~
44096 \begin_layout Description
44098 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44105 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44106 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44109 \begin_layout Description
44111 \begin_inset space ~
44115 \begin_inset space ~
44118 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44124 \begin_inset Index idx
44127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44134 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44137 \begin_layout Description
44139 \begin_inset space ~
44147 \begin_inset space ~
44150 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44157 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44160 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44167 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44168 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44170 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44173 \begin_layout Description
44175 \begin_inset space ~
44179 \begin_inset space ~
44182 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44188 \begin_inset Index idx
44191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44198 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44201 \begin_layout Description
44203 \begin_inset space ~
44206 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44212 \begin_inset Index idx
44215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44217 packages ! inputenc
44223 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44227 \begin_layout Description
44229 \begin_inset space ~
44233 \begin_inset space ~
44237 \begin_inset space ~
44240 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44241 \begin_inset space ~
44247 \begin_layout Description
44249 \begin_inset space ~
44253 \begin_inset space ~
44257 \begin_inset space ~
44260 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44261 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44262 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44266 \begin_layout Description
44268 \begin_inset space ~
44272 \begin_inset space ~
44276 \begin_inset space ~
44279 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44280 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44283 \begin_layout Section
44285 \begin_inset Index idx
44288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44295 \begin_inset Index idx
44298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44305 \begin_inset Index idx
44308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44309 Color ! Shaded boxes
44315 \begin_inset Index idx
44318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44319 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44327 \begin_layout Standard
44328 Here you can alter the font color for the
44332 (default: black), for
44335 \begin_inset space ~
44340 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44344 (default: white) and for
44347 \begin_inset space ~
44357 sets the color back to the default.
44360 \begin_layout Standard
44361 Clicking any button showing
44369 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44370 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44371 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44372 later more quickly.
44375 \begin_layout Standard
44376 Note, if you change the
44379 \begin_inset space ~
44384 font color and use the option
44387 \begin_inset space ~
44392 in the document settings under
44395 \begin_inset space ~
44400 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44401 \begin_inset space ~
44405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44407 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44414 \begin_layout Standard
44415 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44421 \begin_layout Standard
44425 \begin_inset space ~
44434 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44440 Code after a forced page break:
44443 \begin_layout Itemize
44444 For the page color:
44445 \begin_inset Newline newline
44452 pagecolor{color name}
44455 \begin_layout Itemize
44456 For the text color:
44457 \begin_inset Newline newline
44467 \begin_layout Standard
44468 You are restricted to one of
44504 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44517 \begin_inset Newline newline
44520 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44521 names to refer to them:
44524 \begin_layout Itemize
44530 \begin_inset Newline newline
44535 page_backgroundcolor
44538 \begin_layout Itemize
44542 \begin_inset space ~
44548 \begin_inset Newline newline
44556 \begin_layout Itemize
44560 \begin_inset space ~
44566 \begin_inset Newline newline
44574 \begin_layout Itemize
44578 \begin_inset space ~
44584 \begin_inset Newline newline
44592 \begin_layout Standard
44593 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44596 \begin_inset space ~
44604 \begin_inset space ~
44612 \begin_layout Section
44616 \begin_layout Standard
44617 Here you can adjust the
44621 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44625 as described in section
44626 \begin_inset space ~
44630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44632 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44639 \begin_layout Section
44643 \begin_layout Standard
44644 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44650 \begin_inset Index idx
44653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44655 packages ! biblatex
44665 \begin_inset Index idx
44668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44680 \begin_inset Index idx
44683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44691 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44694 Sectioned bibliography
44696 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44702 \begin_inset Index idx
44705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44707 packages ! bibtopic
44717 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44718 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44722 for the generation of the bibliography.
44723 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44730 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44737 \begin_layout Section
44741 \begin_layout Standard
44742 Here you can define the
44746 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44748 \begin_inset space ~
44752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44754 reference "sec:Index"
44761 \begin_layout Section
44765 \begin_layout Standard
44766 The PDF properties are explained in section
44767 \begin_inset space ~
44771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44773 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44780 \begin_layout Section
44784 \begin_layout Standard
44785 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44786 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44792 \begin_inset Index idx
44795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44807 \begin_inset Index idx
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44822 \begin_inset Index idx
44825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44837 \begin_inset Index idx
44840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44852 \begin_inset Index idx
44855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44857 packages ! mathdots
44867 \begin_inset Index idx
44870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44872 packages ! mathtools
44882 \begin_inset Index idx
44885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44897 \begin_inset Index idx
44900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44902 packages ! stackrel
44912 \begin_inset Index idx
44915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44917 packages ! stmaryrd
44927 \begin_inset Index idx
44930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44932 packages ! undertilde
44937 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44940 \begin_layout Description
44941 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44942 -errors in formulas,
44943 ensure that you have this enabled.
44946 \begin_layout Description
44947 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44948 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44949 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44953 \begin_layout Description
44954 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44969 \begin_layout Description
44970 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44973 \begin_inset space ~
44985 \begin_layout Description
44986 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44997 \begin_layout Description
44998 mathtools is used for the math commands
45034 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45041 \begin_layout Description
45042 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45044 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45053 \begin_layout Description
45054 stackrel is used for the math command
45071 \begin_layout Description
45072 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45075 \begin_layout Description
45076 undertilde is used for the math command
45084 Accents for one Character
45093 \begin_layout Section
45097 \begin_layout Standard
45098 The float placement options are described in the section
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45117 \begin_layout Section
45121 \begin_layout Standard
45122 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45124 Program Code Listings
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45137 \begin_layout Section
45141 \begin_layout Standard
45142 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45150 set to be used and set the
45155 The itemize environment is described in section
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45162 reference "sec:Itemize"
45169 \begin_layout Standard
45170 You can furthermore specify a
45173 \begin_inset space ~
45178 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45179 command of the desired character.
45180 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45187 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45193 \begin_inset space \space{}
45197 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45207 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45208 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45211 \begin_layout Standard
45212 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45220 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45221 -packages in the preamble (menu
45224 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45225 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45234 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45238 usepackage{textcomp}
45241 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45245 usepackage{amssymb}
45255 \begin_layout Section
45259 \begin_layout Standard
45260 Branches are described in section
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45267 reference "sec:Branches"
45274 \begin_layout Section
45276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45278 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45285 \begin_layout Standard
45286 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45289 \begin_layout Description
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45298 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45318 View Master Document
45319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45326 Update Master Document
45327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45334 menu or the toolbar.
45335 The default is set in
45337 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45338 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45340 \begin_inset space ~
45343 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45347 \begin_inset space ~
45351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45353 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45360 \begin_layout Description
45362 \begin_inset space ~
45366 \begin_inset space ~
45369 Output settings for the menu
45371 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45379 For a detailed description see section
45381 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45386 \begin_inset space ~
45394 \begin_layout Description
45396 \begin_inset space ~
45400 \begin_inset space ~
45403 Options offers settings for the export format
45411 \begin_inset space ~
45416 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45417 \begin_inset space ~
45420 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45424 \begin_inset space ~
45429 settings are described in detail in section
45431 Math Output in XHTML
45436 \begin_inset space ~
45445 \begin_inset space ~
45449 \begin_inset space ~
45454 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45457 \begin_layout Description
45459 \begin_inset space ~
45464 Save transient properties
45466 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45467 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45468 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45472 \begin_layout Itemize
45473 the activation of change tracking
45476 \begin_layout Itemize
45477 the output of tracked changes
45480 \begin_layout Itemize
45481 the recording of the document directory path.
45484 \begin_layout Standard
45485 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45486 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45490 \begin_layout Section
45498 \begin_layout Standard
45499 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45501 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45503 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45505 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45509 \begin_layout Standard
45510 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45511 -syntax is given in section
45512 \begin_inset space ~
45516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45518 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45525 \begin_layout Chapter
45531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45533 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45538 \begin_inset Index idx
45541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45550 \begin_layout Standard
45551 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45553 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45557 It has the following submenus.
45560 \begin_layout Section
45564 \begin_layout Subsection
45568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45569 User Interface File
45570 \begin_inset Index idx
45573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45574 Customization ! of toolbars
45580 \begin_inset Index idx
45583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45584 Customization ! of menus
45592 \begin_layout Standard
45593 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45594 interface (ui) file.
45595 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45603 \begin_layout Description
45608 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45611 \begin_layout Description
45618 the menu entries in popup context menus
45621 \begin_layout Description
45626 specifies the toolbar buttons
45629 \begin_layout Standard
45630 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45631 and edit the entries.
45634 \begin_layout Standard
45635 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45647 entries must be finished with an explicit
45672 and in the case of the
45673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45685 The syntax for the entries is:
45688 \begin_layout Standard
45689 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45718 \begin_layout Standard
45720 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45723 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45724 -functions are listed in the menu
45726 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45728 \begin_inset space ~
45736 \begin_layout Standard
45737 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45743 \begin_layout Standard
45744 For example, assuming you use the menu
45746 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45749 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45753 \begin_layout Standard
45754 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45778 \begin_layout Standard
45780 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45795 to have the sixth bookmark.
45798 \begin_layout Standard
45802 \begin_inset space ~
45807 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45808 's toolbar buttons.
45809 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45810 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45813 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45821 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45825 \begin_layout Standard
45828 Enable tool tips in main work area
45830 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45838 \begin_layout Standard
45843 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45844 should display in the menu
45846 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45848 \begin_inset space ~
45856 \begin_layout Subsection
45860 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45864 \begin_layout Standard
45867 Restore window layouts and geometries
45870 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45871 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45875 \begin_layout Standard
45878 Restore cursor positions
45880 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45884 \begin_layout Standard
45887 Load opened files from last session
45889 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45893 \begin_layout Standard
45896 Clear all session information
45898 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45899 sessions (cursor positions, names
45900 of last opened documents, etc.).
45903 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45907 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45912 \begin_inset Index idx
45915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45924 \begin_layout Standard
45927 Backup original documents when saving
45929 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45930 it was saved the last time.
45931 It is stored in the
45934 \begin_inset space ~
45940 \begin_inset space ~
45944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45946 reference "sec:Paths"
45950 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45953 \begin_inset space ~
45959 The backup file has the file extension
45960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45974 \begin_layout Standard
45977 Backup documents, every
45979 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45982 \begin_layout Standard
45985 Save documents compressed by default
45987 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45988 \begin_inset space ~
45992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45994 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45999 This applies to newly created documents only.
46000 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46004 Windows & work area
46007 \begin_layout Standard
46010 Open documents in tabs
46012 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46016 \begin_layout Standard
46021 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46028 \begin_inset space ~
46032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46034 reference "sec:Paths"
46038 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46045 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46046 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46047 of \SpecialChar LyX
46049 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46050 instance is created for each file.
46053 \begin_layout Standard
46056 Single close-tab button
46058 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46068 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46069 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46070 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46074 \begin_layout Standard
46075 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46084 before the change takes effect.
46092 \begin_layout Standard
46097 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46099 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46101 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46105 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46106 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46107 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46110 \begin_layout Subsection
46112 \begin_inset Index idx
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46124 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46131 \begin_layout Standard
46132 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46136 \begin_layout Standard
46137 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46145 This section only deals with the fonts
46149 the \SpecialChar LyX
46151 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46155 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46166 \begin_layout Standard
46167 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46184 (depends on the system) as its
46187 \begin_inset space ~
46203 \begin_layout Standard
46204 You can change the font size with the
46211 \begin_layout Standard
46216 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46221 points have the size of 1
46222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46226 \begin_inset space ~
46230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46232 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46237 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46242 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46243 \begin_inset space ~
46247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46249 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46256 \begin_layout Subsection
46258 \begin_inset Index idx
46261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46262 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46269 \begin_inset Index idx
46272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46281 \begin_layout Standard
46282 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46283 by choosing an item in the
46284 list and selecting the
46291 \begin_layout Standard
46292 By checking the option
46296 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46299 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46300 \begin_inset space ~
46304 \begin_inset space ~
46309 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46312 \begin_layout Subsection
46314 \begin_inset Index idx
46317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46326 \begin_layout Standard
46327 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46331 \begin_layout Standard
46336 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46337 This feature is described in section
46338 \begin_inset space ~
46342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46344 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46351 \begin_layout Standard
46352 Checking the option
46355 \begin_inset space ~
46359 \begin_inset space ~
46363 \begin_inset space ~
46368 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46371 \begin_layout Section
46373 \begin_inset Index idx
46376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46385 \begin_layout Subsection
46389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46393 \begin_layout Standard
46396 Cursor follows scrollbar
46398 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46402 \begin_layout Standard
46403 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46404 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46405 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46408 \begin_layout Standard
46411 Scroll below end of document
46413 is self-explanatory.
46416 \begin_layout Standard
46417 In \SpecialChar LyX
46418 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46425 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46427 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46428 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46431 \begin_layout Standard
46434 Sort environments alphabetically
46436 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46439 \begin_layout Standard
46442 Group environments by their category
46444 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46447 \begin_layout Standard
46452 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46467 \begin_layout Standard
46468 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46473 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46474 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46478 \begin_layout Subsection
46480 \begin_inset Index idx
46483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46490 \begin_inset Index idx
46493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46494 Settings ! Shortcuts
46502 \begin_layout Standard
46507 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46509 Several binding files are available, among them:
46512 \begin_layout Description
46513 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46516 \begin_layout Description
46517 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46529 \begin_layout Description
46530 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46541 \begin_layout Standard
46542 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46547 , and binding files for special languages.
46548 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46553 \begin_inset space \space{}
46557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46565 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46566 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46567 will try to use the appropriate binding
46571 \begin_layout Standard
46572 Some binding files, like
46576 , only have a limited scope.
46577 When looking at the end of the file
46581 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46584 \begin_layout Standard
46588 \begin_inset space ~
46592 \begin_inset space ~
46597 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46598 in the selected key binding file.
46601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46605 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46610 \begin_inset Index idx
46613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46614 Key Bindings ! Editing
46622 \begin_layout Standard
46623 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46624 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46625 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46626 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46629 Show key-bindings containing
46632 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46633 Insert there for example as keyword
46634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46641 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46642 functions that contain
46643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46651 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46652 All \SpecialChar LyX
46653 functions are also listed in the file
46658 that you will find in the
46665 \begin_layout Standard
46666 For example, to add the shortcut
46674 , select the function and press the
46679 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46680 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46683 \begin_layout Standard
46684 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46685 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46687 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46688 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46690 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46695 \begin_layout Standard
46696 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46699 \begin_layout Standard
46700 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46702 The syntax of the entries is:
46705 \begin_layout Standard
46711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46730 \begin_layout Standard
46731 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46732 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46760 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46761 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46762 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46763 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46765 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46769 , you needed to specify it as
46774 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46777 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46780 \begin_layout Subsection
46782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46784 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46789 \begin_inset Index idx
46792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46799 \begin_inset Index idx
46802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46803 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46811 \begin_layout Standard
46812 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46813 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46814 provides keyboard maps.
46815 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46816 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46819 \begin_inset space ~
46823 \begin_inset space ~
46828 and select the keyboard map file named
46835 \begin_layout Standard
46844 keyboard map and, if you use the
46848 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46851 arg "keymap-primary"
46857 arg "keymap-secondary"
46860 respectively or toggle between them with
46863 arg "keymap-toggle"
46869 \begin_layout Standard
46870 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46878 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46887 \begin_layout Standard
46888 You can also specify the mouse
46890 Wheel scrolling speed
46893 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46897 Middle mouse button pasting
46899 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46900 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46903 \begin_layout Standard
46911 \begin_inset space ~
46915 \begin_inset space ~
46920 you can select a key for zooming.
46921 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46924 \begin_layout Subsection
46928 \begin_layout Standard
46929 Input completion is described in section
46930 \begin_inset space ~
46934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46936 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46943 \begin_layout Section
46945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46952 \begin_inset Index idx
46955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46962 \begin_inset Index idx
46965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46974 \begin_layout Standard
46975 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46976 are normally determined during
46978 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46981 \begin_layout Description
46983 \begin_inset space ~
46986 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46987 's working directory.
46988 It is the default when you
46999 \begin_inset space ~
47007 \begin_layout Description
47009 \begin_inset space ~
47012 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47014 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47016 \begin_inset space ~
47020 \begin_inset space ~
47028 \begin_layout Description
47030 \begin_inset space ~
47033 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47039 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47043 \begin_inset Newline newline
47047 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47059 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47060 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47068 \begin_layout Description
47070 \begin_inset space ~
47074 \begin_inset Index idx
47077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47083 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47084 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47085 \begin_inset space ~
47089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47091 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47099 will be used to save the backups.
47100 \begin_inset Newline newline
47103 Backup files have the ending
47104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47114 \begin_layout Description
47116 \begin_inset space ~
47119 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47120 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47122 \begin_inset Newline newline
47129 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47135 You can edit this file with the program
47144 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47145 in its preferences under
47148 \begin_inset space ~
47154 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47159 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47161 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47162 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47168 and \SpecialChar LyX
47169 need to be running the same time.
47170 \begin_inset Newline newline
47173 The pipe is also used for the
47177 feature, see section
47178 \begin_inset space ~
47182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47184 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47189 \begin_inset Newline newline
47192 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47193 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47194 \begin_inset Newline newline
47210 \begin_layout Description
47212 \begin_inset space ~
47215 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47218 \begin_layout Description
47220 \begin_inset space ~
47223 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47224 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47225 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47228 \begin_layout Description
47230 \begin_inset space ~
47233 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47239 You only need to specify it if you are using
47243 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47245 For \SpecialChar LyX
47250 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47254 \begin_layout Description
47256 \begin_inset space ~
47259 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47260 When \SpecialChar LyX
47261 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47262 to find it on the system.
47263 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47265 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47274 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47275 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47278 \begin_layout Description
47280 \begin_inset space ~
47283 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47284 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47285 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47286 code or in the document
47288 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47290 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47291 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47292 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47293 scanned for the input files.
47294 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47295 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47297 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47298 compilation may fail for some documents.
47301 \begin_layout Section
47305 \begin_layout Standard
47306 Here you can insert your
47315 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47317 \begin_inset space ~
47321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47323 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47327 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47330 \begin_layout Section
47332 \begin_inset Index idx
47335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47336 Language ! Settings
47342 \begin_inset Index idx
47345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47346 Settings ! Language
47354 \begin_layout Subsection
47356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47358 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47365 \begin_layout Description
47367 \begin_inset space ~
47371 \begin_inset space ~
47374 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47376 You can find its actual translation status here:
47377 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47379 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47387 \begin_layout Description
47389 \begin_inset space ~
47392 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47393 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47394 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47395 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47412 The most widespread language package is
47417 \begin_inset Index idx
47420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47427 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47429 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47430 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47431 come with the alternative
47437 \begin_inset Index idx
47440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47442 packages ! polyglossia
47447 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47448 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47454 The available selections are described in section
47455 \begin_inset space ~
47459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47461 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47468 \begin_layout Description
47470 \begin_inset space ~
47473 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47474 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47475 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47476 An example is the start command
47482 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47484 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47488 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47504 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47509 \begin_layout Description
47511 \begin_inset space ~
47519 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47520 command toggles the package on and off.
47523 \begin_layout Description
47525 \begin_inset space ~
47529 \begin_inset space ~
47532 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47536 \begin_layout Description
47538 \begin_inset space ~
47542 \begin_inset space ~
47545 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47549 \begin_layout Description
47551 \begin_inset space ~
47555 \begin_inset space ~
47558 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47559 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47560 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47562 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47569 \begin_layout Description
47571 \begin_inset space ~
47574 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47576 When this option is not set, the
47579 \begin_inset space ~
47584 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47586 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47589 \begin_inset space ~
47597 \begin_layout Description
47599 \begin_inset space ~
47605 \begin_inset space ~
47611 When it is not set, the
47614 \begin_inset space ~
47619 is set to the end of the document.
47622 \begin_layout Description
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47628 \begin_inset space ~
47631 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47632 language will be underlined in blue.
47635 \begin_layout Description
47637 \begin_inset space ~
47641 \begin_inset space ~
47644 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47645 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47648 \begin_layout Description
47650 \begin_inset space ~
47653 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47654 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47655 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47656 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47659 \begin_layout Subsection
47663 \begin_layout Standard
47664 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47671 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47678 \begin_layout Section
47682 \begin_layout Subsection
47684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47686 name "subsec:General-output"
47693 \begin_layout Description
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47698 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47700 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47702 \begin_inset space ~
47708 For a detailed description see section
47710 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47715 \begin_inset space ~
47723 \begin_layout Description
47725 \begin_inset space ~
47728 Options Options for the program
47732 that is used for the export format
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47743 reference "subsec:Export"
47748 Possible options are listed in the
47753 \begin_inset Newline newline
47757 \begin_inset Flex URL
47760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47762 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47772 \begin_layout Description
47774 \begin_inset space ~
47778 \begin_inset space ~
47781 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47784 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47785 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47787 \begin_inset space ~
47793 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47796 \begin_layout Description
47798 \begin_inset space ~
47802 \begin_inset Index idx
47805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47812 \begin_inset Index idx
47815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47816 Settings ! Date format
47821 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47822 \begin_inset Newline newline
47826 \begin_inset Flex URL
47829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47831 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47837 \begin_inset Newline newline
47840 For example the format
47841 \begin_inset Newline newline
47845 \begin_inset Newline newline
47848 prints the date as day/month/year.
47851 \begin_layout Description
47853 \begin_inset space ~
47857 \begin_inset space ~
47860 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47861 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47864 \begin_layout Subsection
47870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47872 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47877 \begin_inset Index idx
47880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47881 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47890 \begin_layout Description
47892 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
47894 \begin_inset space ~
47902 \begin_inset space ~
47906 \begin_inset space ~
47909 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47914 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47935 are used for Cyrillic.
47936 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47949 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47951 sets up in the background.
47952 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47957 \begin_layout Description
47959 \begin_inset space ~
47963 \begin_inset space ~
47967 \begin_inset space ~
47971 \begin_inset space ~
47974 options They only have an effect when the program
47978 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47981 \begin_layout Standard
47982 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47983 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47984 manuals of the applications.
47987 \begin_layout Description
47989 \begin_inset space ~
47992 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47993 \begin_inset space ~
47997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47999 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48006 \begin_layout Description
48008 \begin_inset space ~
48011 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48012 \begin_inset space ~
48016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48018 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48025 \begin_layout Description
48027 \begin_inset space ~
48030 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48031 \begin_inset space ~
48035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48037 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48044 \begin_layout Description
48050 \begin_inset space ~
48053 command Command for the program
48055 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48058 that is described in the section
48060 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48065 Additional Features
48070 \begin_layout Standard
48071 There are additionally the following options:
48074 \begin_layout Description
48076 \begin_inset space ~
48080 \begin_inset space ~
48084 \begin_inset space ~
48088 \begin_inset space ~
48093 \begin_inset space ~
48096 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48114 to separate folders.
48115 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48117 \begin_inset Index idx
48120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48127 \begin_inset Index idx
48130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48139 \begin_layout Description
48141 \begin_inset space ~
48145 \begin_inset space ~
48149 \begin_inset space ~
48153 \begin_inset space ~
48157 \begin_inset space ~
48161 \begin_inset space ~
48164 changes Removes all manually set
48170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48171 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48173 \begin_inset space ~
48178 dialog when changing the document class.
48181 \begin_layout Section
48183 \begin_inset space ~
48187 \begin_inset Index idx
48190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48199 \begin_layout Subsection
48201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48203 name "subsec:Converters"
48208 \begin_inset Index idx
48211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48220 \begin_layout Standard
48221 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48222 from one format to another.
48223 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48224 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48231 \begin_inset space ~
48236 field and press the
48241 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48245 \begin_inset space ~
48250 drop-down list, modify the
48254 field and press the
48261 \begin_layout Standard
48264 Converter File Cache
48270 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48272 Maximum Age (in days
48275 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48276 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48279 \begin_layout Standard
48280 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48281 definition, is described in the section
48292 \begin_layout Subsection
48294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48296 name "sec:File-Formats"
48301 \begin_inset Index idx
48304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48311 \begin_inset Index idx
48314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48323 \begin_layout Standard
48324 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48334 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48337 \begin_layout Standard
48338 You can also define the
48340 Default output format
48342 that is used when you use
48344 View, Update, View Master Document
48348 Update Master Document
48354 menu or the toolbar.
48357 \begin_layout Standard
48358 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48369 \begin_layout Standard
48370 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48372 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48373 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48374 This is done by specifying a
48379 More about this is described in the section
48390 \begin_layout Chapter
48391 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48393 \begin_inset Index idx
48396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48405 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48412 \begin_layout Standard
48414 \begin_inset space ~
48418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48420 reference "tab:Units"
48424 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48425 and used in this documentation.
48428 \begin_layout Standard
48429 \begin_inset Float table
48435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48436 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48454 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48462 \begin_inset Tabular
48463 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48464 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48465 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48466 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48467 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48620 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48891 scaled point (65536
48892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48959 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
48964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49083 % of original image width
49088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49172 \begin_layout Standard
49173 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49176 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49183 \begin_layout Bibliography
49184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49185 LatexCommand bibitem
49192 The \SpecialChar LyX
49194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49197 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49203 \begin_inset Newline newline
49207 \begin_inset Flex URL
49210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49212 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49220 \begin_layout Bibliography
49221 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49222 LatexCommand bibitem
49223 key "latexcompanion"
49228 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49230 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49231 Companion Second Edition.
49234 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49237 \begin_layout Bibliography
49238 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49239 LatexCommand bibitem
49245 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49248 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49252 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49255 \begin_layout Bibliography
49256 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49257 LatexCommand bibitem
49266 : A Document Preparation System.
49269 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49272 \begin_layout Bibliography
49273 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49274 LatexCommand bibitem
49284 The \SpecialChar TeX
49288 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49291 \begin_layout Bibliography
49292 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49293 LatexCommand bibitem
49299 The \SpecialChar TeX
49301 \begin_inset Newline newline
49305 \begin_inset Flex URL
49308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49310 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49318 \begin_layout Bibliography
49319 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49320 LatexCommand bibitem
49326 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49328 \begin_inset Newline newline
49332 \begin_inset Flex URL
49335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49337 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49345 \begin_layout Bibliography
49346 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49347 LatexCommand bibitem
49354 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49356 name "Documentation"
49357 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49364 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49368 \begin_inset Newline newline
49372 \begin_inset Flex URL
49375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49377 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49385 \begin_layout Bibliography
49386 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49387 LatexCommand bibitem
49394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49396 name "Documentation"
49397 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49402 how to use the program
49404 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49408 \begin_inset Newline newline
49412 \begin_inset Flex URL
49415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49417 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49425 \begin_layout Bibliography
49426 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49427 LatexCommand bibitem
49434 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49436 name "Documentation"
49437 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49442 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49448 \begin_inset Index idx
49451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49453 packages ! biblatex
49459 \begin_inset Newline newline
49463 \begin_inset Flex URL
49466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49468 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49476 \begin_layout Bibliography
49477 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49478 LatexCommand bibitem
49485 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49487 name "Documentation"
49488 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49493 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49499 \begin_inset Index idx
49502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49510 \begin_inset Newline newline
49514 \begin_inset Flex URL
49517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49519 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49527 \begin_layout Bibliography
49528 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49529 LatexCommand bibitem
49536 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49538 name "Documentation"
49539 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49549 \begin_inset Newline newline
49553 \begin_inset Flex URL
49556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49558 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49566 \begin_layout Bibliography
49567 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49568 LatexCommand bibitem
49569 key "makeindex-man"
49575 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49578 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49588 \begin_inset Newline newline
49592 \begin_inset Flex URL
49595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49597 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49605 \begin_layout Bibliography
49606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49607 LatexCommand bibitem
49614 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49616 name "Documentation"
49617 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49627 \begin_inset Newline newline
49631 \begin_inset Flex URL
49634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49636 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49644 \begin_layout Bibliography
49645 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49646 LatexCommand bibitem
49653 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49655 name "Documentation"
49656 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49661 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49663 \begin_inset Newline newline
49667 \begin_inset Flex URL
49670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49672 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49680 \begin_layout Bibliography
49681 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49682 LatexCommand bibitem
49689 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49691 name "Documentation"
49692 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49697 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49703 \begin_inset Index idx
49706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49714 \begin_inset Newline newline
49718 \begin_inset Flex URL
49721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49723 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49731 \begin_layout Bibliography
49732 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49733 LatexCommand bibitem
49740 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49742 name "Documentation"
49743 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49748 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49754 \begin_inset Index idx
49757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49759 packages ! enumitem
49765 \begin_inset Newline newline
49769 \begin_inset Flex URL
49772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49774 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49782 \begin_layout Bibliography
49783 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49784 LatexCommand bibitem
49791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49793 name "Documentation"
49794 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49799 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49805 \begin_inset Index idx
49808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49810 packages ! fancyhdr
49816 \begin_inset Newline newline
49820 \begin_inset Flex URL
49823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49825 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49833 \begin_layout Bibliography
49834 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49835 LatexCommand bibitem
49842 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49844 name "Documentation"
49845 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
49850 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49856 \begin_inset Index idx
49859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49861 packages ! hyperref
49867 \begin_inset Newline newline
49871 \begin_inset Flex URL
49874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49876 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
49884 \begin_layout Bibliography
49885 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49886 LatexCommand bibitem
49893 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49895 name "Documentation"
49896 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
49901 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49907 \begin_inset Index idx
49910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49912 packages ! microtpye
49918 \begin_inset Newline newline
49922 \begin_inset Flex URL
49925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49927 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
49935 \begin_layout Bibliography
49936 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49937 LatexCommand bibitem
49944 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49946 name "Documentation"
49947 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49952 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49958 \begin_inset Index idx
49961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49969 \begin_inset Newline newline
49973 \begin_inset Flex URL
49976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49978 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49986 \begin_layout Bibliography
49987 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49988 LatexCommand bibitem
49995 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49997 name "Documentation"
49998 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50003 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50009 \begin_inset Index idx
50012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50014 packages ! prettyref
50020 \begin_inset Newline newline
50024 \begin_inset Flex URL
50027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50029 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50037 \begin_layout Bibliography
50038 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50039 LatexCommand bibitem
50046 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50048 name "Documentation"
50049 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50054 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50060 \begin_inset Index idx
50063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50065 packages ! refstyle
50071 \begin_inset Newline newline
50075 \begin_inset Flex URL
50078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50080 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50088 \begin_layout Bibliography
50089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50090 LatexCommand bibitem
50097 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50100 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50105 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50107 \begin_inset Newline newline
50111 \begin_inset Flex URL
50114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50116 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50124 \begin_layout Bibliography
50125 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50126 LatexCommand bibitem
50133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50136 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50141 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50143 \begin_inset Newline newline
50147 \begin_inset Flex URL
50150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50152 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50160 \begin_layout Bibliography
50161 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50162 LatexCommand bibitem
50169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50172 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50177 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50178 for Cyrillic languages:
50179 \begin_inset Newline newline
50183 \begin_inset Flex URL
50186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50188 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50196 \begin_layout Bibliography
50197 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50198 LatexCommand bibitem
50205 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50208 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50213 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50215 \begin_inset Newline newline
50219 \begin_inset Flex URL
50222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50224 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50232 \begin_layout Bibliography
50233 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50234 LatexCommand bibitem
50241 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50244 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50249 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50251 \begin_inset Newline newline
50255 \begin_inset Flex URL
50258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50260 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50268 \begin_layout Bibliography
50269 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50270 LatexCommand bibitem
50277 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50280 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50285 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50287 \begin_inset Newline newline
50291 \begin_inset Flex URL
50294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50296 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50304 \begin_layout Standard
50305 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50339 \begin_inset Note Note
50342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50349 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50350 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50351 bibliography is the second one:
50359 \begin_layout Standard
50360 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50361 LatexCommand bibtex
50362 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50363 options "biblio/alphadin"
50370 \begin_layout Standard
50371 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50375 \begin_layout Standard
50379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50385 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50394 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50402 \begin_inset Note Note
50405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50406 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50407 \begin_inset space ~
50411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50413 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50425 \begin_layout Standard
50426 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50427 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50433 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50434 LatexCommand printindex